Pioneer BDP-V6000 Operating Instructions

Blu-ray Disc PLAYER BDP-V6000 Operating Instructions V6000_CUXJ_EN.bo ok 1 ページ ２００９年６ 月５日　金曜 日　午前１１ 時５７分
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN IMPOR T ANT D3-4-2-1-1_A1_En IMPORTANT NOTICE THE SERIAL NUMBER FOR THIS EQUIPMENT IS L OCA TED IN THE REAR. PLEASE WRITE THIS SERIAL NUMBER ON YOUR ENCL OSED WARRANT Y CARD AND KEEP IN A SECURE AREA. THIS IS FOR YOUR SECURIT Y . D1-4-2- 6-1 *_A1_En Thank you f or buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will kno w how to operate y our model proper ly . After you ha ve finished reading the instructions, put them away i n a sa fe place for future ref erence. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to P art 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter ference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that inter ference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on , the user is encouraged to tr y to correct the inter ference by one or more of the following measures: — Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. — Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . — Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. — Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. D8-10-1-2_A1_En Information to User Alterations or modifications carried out without appropriate authori zation may invalidate the user ’s right to operate the equipment. D8-10-2_A1_En This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. D8-10-1-3_A1_En CA UTION This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the unit to other equipment. T o prevent electromagnetic inter ference with electric appliances such as radios and televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections. D8-10-3 a_A1_En CAUTION : USE OF CONTROLS OR AD JUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MA Y RESUL T IN HA ZARDOUS RADIA TION E XPOSURE. CAUTION : THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE E YE HA ZARD. D6-8-2-1_En    "#%)!'%  %"!"'#!*!  &"(%&&(&'!"!' $(# !'   ! 2 En V6000_CUXJ_EN.bo ok 2 ページ ２００９年６ 月５日　金曜 日　午前１１ 時５７分
Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. F ollow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water . Clean only with dr y cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer ’s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other . A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. P rotect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer . Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer , or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injur y from tip-over . Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all ser vicing to qualified service personnel. Ser vicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally , or has been dropped. P1-4-2-2_En 11) 12) 13) 14) CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. Locatio n: inside of the unit CLA SS 1 LA SER PRODUCT D3-4-2-1-8*_C_En Operating En vironment Operating environment temperature and humidity : 5 °C to 35 °C ( 41 °F to 95 °F); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c*_A1_En   &$(# !'&!"'*'%#%"" "#% )!'% "%&"-%"!"'#!,"!'!% *'$(!%'&$(# !'&(&)&"% "*%#"'"% #"&''"%##!&#&!%! "% "&'(%  ! WARNING The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or region. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area where this unit will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully . 3 En V6000_CUXJ_EN.bo ok 3 ページ ２００９年６ 月５日　金曜 日　午前１１ 時５７分
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be per formed only by qualified ser vice personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A1_En CAUTION The  S TA NDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. S ince the power cord ser ves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power . Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire ha zard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En Wash hands after handling             POWER-CORD CAUTION H andle the power cord by the plug. D o not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged, contact the P ioneer ser vice center on the back cover , or your dealer for a replacement. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of cer tain U .S. patents and other intellectual proper ty rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macro vision Cor poration. Rev erse engineer ing or disassembly is prohibited. FEDERAL COMMUNICA TIONS COMMISSION DECLARA TION OF CONFORMITY This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is sub ject to the following two conditions : ( 1) This device may not cause harmful inter ference, and ( 2) this device must accept any inter ference received, including inter ference that may cause undesired operation. P roduct Name : Blu-ray Disc PLA YER Model Number : BDP - V6000 Responsible P arty Name : PI ONEER ELECTR ONIC S ( USA), I NC. SE RV ICE SUPPO RT D IV IS ION Address : 1925 E. DOMI NGUEZ S T. LONG BEAC H , CA 90810- 1003, U. S.A. P hone :1 - 800- 421- 1404 U RL: http:// www .pioneerelectronics.com D8-10-4*_B1_En 4 En V6000_CUXJ_EN.bo ok 4 ページ ２００９年６ 月５日　金曜 日　午前１１ 時５７分
S001_En Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit you’ve just purchased is only the start of your musical enjoyment. Now it’s time to consider how you can maximize the fun and excitement your equipment offers. This manufacturer and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly , without affecting your sensitive hearing. Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing “comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound. So what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your hearing adapts. To establish a safe level : @ Start your volume control at a low setting. @ Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it comfortably and clearly , and without distortion. Once you have established a comfortable sound level : @ Set the dial and leave it there. T aking a minute to do this now will help to prevent hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we want you listening for a lifetime. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime Since hearing damage from loud noise is often undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of sound levels is included for your protection. Decibel Level Example 30 Quiet librar y , sof t whispers 40 Living room, refrigerator , bedroom away from traffic 50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office 60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine 70 V acuum cleaner , hair dr yer , noisy restaurant 80 Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock at two feet. THE FOLL OWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS UNDER CONST ANT EXPOSURE 90 Subway , motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower 100 Garbage truck, chain saw , pneumatic drill 120 Rock band concert in front of speakers, thunderclap 140 Gunshot blast, jet plane 180 Rocket launching pad Information courtesy of the Deafness Research F oundation. 5 En V6000_CUXJ_EN.bo ok 5 ページ ２００９年６ 月５日　金曜 日　午前１１ 時５７分
6 En Contents 01 Before you start What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Putting the batte r ies in the r emote cont r ol. . . . . . . . . . 7 Softwa r e u p dating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Ty p es of discs/files that can be p layed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Playable discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Playable files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Pa r t Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 Remote Cont r ol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 F r ont Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 F r ont Pane l Dis p lay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Rea r Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 02 Installation Cautions on use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Cautions on Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4 Place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Moving the p layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5 Tu r n the p owe r off when not using the p laye r . . . . . . 1 5 Condensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Cleaning the p layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Caution fo r wh en the unit is installed in a r ack with a glass doo r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Cleaning the p ickup len s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Handling discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5 Installati on P r ocedur e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 6 03 Connecting up Connecting using an HDMI cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 8 About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 About KURO LINK function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Connecting an AV r eceiver o r amp lifier . . . . . . . . . . . 2 0 Connecting video and audio cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Connecting a TV using a video/audio cable . . . . . . . . 21 Connecting an AV r eceiver o r amp lifier usin g audio cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Connecting c om p onents to the USB p or t . . . . . . . . . . . 21 About USB (exte r nal sto rage) devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Connecting the USB (exte r nal sto r age) device. . . . . . 2 2 Netwo r k connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Connecting via an Ethe r n et hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 Connecting the p ower co r d. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 04 Getting Started Making settings using the Setu p Navigato r menu . . . . 23 O pe r ating the TV with the p laye r ’s r emote con t r ol . . . . 24 TV P r eset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Using the TOOLS menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Switchin g the vide o out p ut te r minal to be viewed . . . . 2 6 Switchin g the out p ut video r esolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 05 Playback Playing discs o r files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Fo r wa r d and reve r se scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Playing s p ecific titles, cha p te r s o r t racks . . . . . . . . . . 30 Ski pp ing content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Ste p fo r wa r d and ste p r eve r se . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Switching the came r a angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 0 Switching the subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Switching the audio and seconda r y audio . . . . . . . . . 31 Switching t he seconda r y video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Dis p laying the disc info r mation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Playback functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Using the Play Mode functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Playing f r om a s p ecific time (T ime Sea r ch) . . . . . . . . 33 Playing a s p ecific title, cha p ter or tr ack (Sea r ch) . . . 33 Playing a s p ecific section within a title o r tr ack r ep eatedly (A-B Rep eat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Playing r ep eatedly (Re p eat Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Playing in r andom o r der (Random Play) . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Abou t Play Mode ty p es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Playing f r om the Home Media Galle r y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Playing image files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Playing audio files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Playing in the desi r ed o r der (HMG Pla ylist) . . . . . . . . 37 06 Adjusting audio and video Adjusting the video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Adjusting the audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Adjusting the Audio DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Adjusting the out p ut level of the diffe r en t s p eaker s du r ing BD/DVD p layback (Channel Level) . . . . . . . . . 40 Adjusting the audio delay (Li p Sync) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 07 Detailed settings Changing the settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 O pe r ating th e Initial Setu p sc r een . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Softwa r e u p dating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Resto r ing all the settings to the facto r y defa ult settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 About the audio ou t p ut settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Language Code Table and Count r y/Ar ea Code Table 54 08 Advanced setup Changing the settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 O pe r ating the Advanced Setu p sc r een . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Playing titles /cha p ter s in the r egister ed o r der (Playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 C r eating p laylist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Playing the p laylist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 09 Additional information Se r ial inte r face s p ecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Se r ial cont r ol s p ecificatio ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Connection to a com p uter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Commands and sta tuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 List of usable commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Command mnemonic s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 A r guments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Communications inte r face manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 T r oubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 KURO LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Netwo r k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Othe r s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Glossa r y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 S p ecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 V6000_CUXJ_EN.bo ok 6 ページ ２００９年６ 月５日　金曜 日　午前１１ 時５７分
7 En 01 Chapter 1 Before you start What’s in the box •R e m o t e c o n t r ol x 1 • Video/audio cable (yellow/white/ r ed p lugs) x 1 • AA/R6 d ry cell batte r ies x 2 •P o w e r co r d x 1 •R a c k m o u n t b r acket x 2 •U n d e rp late x 1 • Included g r ay sc r ew x 2 •W a rr anty ca r d •O p er ating instr uctions (this document) A la r ge Philli p s sc r ewdr iver (  No. 2) is r equir ed to mount the r ack mount b r acket. Please pr oc u re one. Putting the batteries in the remote control 1 Open the rear cover. 2 Insert the batteries (AA/R6 x 2). Inse r t as indicated by the  / ma r ks into the batte r y com p ar tment. 3 Close the rear cov er. Close secu r ely (a click should be hea r d). Caution • Do not use any batte r ies othe r than the ones s p ecified. Also, do not use a new batte r y togethe r with an old one. • When loadin g the batte r ies into the r emote cont r ol, set them in the pr o pe r di r ec tion, as ind icated by the p olar ity mar ks (  and  ). • Do not heat batte r ies, disassemble them, o r th r ow them into flam es o r wate r . • Batte r ies may have diffe r ent voltages, even if they look simila r . Do not use diffe r ent kinds of batte r ies togeth e r . •T o pr event leakage o f batte r y fluid, r emove the batte r ies if you do not p la n to use the r emot e cont r ol fo r a long p er iod of time (1 month o r mo r e). If the fluid should leak, w i p e it ca r efully off the inside of the case, then inse r t new batte r ies. I f a batte r y should leak and the fluid shou ld get on you r skin, flush it off with la r ge quantities of wate r . • When dis posing of used batte r ie s, p lease comp ly with gove r nmental r egulations o r envi r onment al p ublic institutio n’s r ules that a pp ly in you r count r y/a r ea. • WARNING Do not use o r sto r e batte r ies in dir ect sunlight o r othe r excessively hot p lace, such as inside a ca r o r nea r a heate r . This can cause batte r ies to leak, ove r heat, ex p lode o r ca tch fi r e. It can als o r educe the life o r p er for mance of batte r ies. D3-4-2-3-3_En Software updating When the softwa r e is u p dated, pr oduct info r mation conce r ning this pr oduct may be made p ublic on the Pionee r website. Check the u p date o r se r vice info r mation conce r ning this pr oduct. P r ess lightly on this p ar t and slide into the di r ection of the a rr ow. Inse r t the negative (  ) side fi r st. V6000_CUXJ_EN.bo ok 7 ページ ２００９年６ 月５日　金曜 日　午前１１ 時５７分
01 8 En Types of discs/files that can be played Playable discs Discs with the lo go marks below indicated on the disc la bel, pack age or jacket can be played. “Blu-ray Disc” and are trademarks. is a trademark of DVD Form at/Logo Lice nsing Corporation. Disc type Logo Applicatio n format BDMV 1 1. Including the AVCH D fo r mat. BDAV DVD-Video DVD VR CD-DA DTS-CD DATA-DIS C 2 2. Discs on which image o r audio files a r e r ecor ded. BD 3 3. Including dual-laye r ed discs. BD-ROM    BD-R  4 4. F inalize (close) them befo r e p laying them on this p layer .     BD-RE    DVD DVD-ROM   DVD-R 3 , 4,5 5. DVD-R fo r Autho r ing discs (3.95 and 4.7 GB) cannot be p layed.   DVD-RW 4,6 6. Ve r sion 1.0 DVD-RW discs cannot be p layed.   DVD R 3,4   DVD RW 4   CD CD-DA (Audio CD)   CD-R 4    CD-RW 4    CD-ROM    V6000_CUXJ_EN.bo ok 8 ページ ２００９年６ 月５日　金曜 日　午前１１ 時５７分
9 En 01  Discs that cannot be played • HD DVDs •D V D A u d i o d i s c s •D V D - R A M d i s c s •S A C D s •V i d e o C D s •S V C D s It is p ossible that some discs ot he r than the ones listed above may not be p la yable eithe r . Note • Some discs cannot be p layed, even if one of the logo ma r ks on the pr evious p age is indicated. •T o p lay 8 cm discs, set the disc in the 8 cm disc de pr ession in the cente r of the disc t r ay. N o ada p te r is necessa r y. 8 cm BD-ROMs cannot be p layed.  About playback of unauthorized copies Cinavia Notice This pr oduct uses Cinavia t echnology to l imit the use o f unautho r ized cop ies of some commer ci ally- pr oduced film and videos and thei r soundt r acks. Whe n a pr ohibited use of an un autho r ized co p y is detected, a message will be dis p layed and p layback o r co p ying will be inte rr u p ted. Mo r e info r mation about Cinavia tec hnology is pr ovided a t the Cinavia Online Consume r Info r mation Cente r at htt p :/ /www.cinavia.com. To r equest additional info r mation about Cinavi a by mail, send a p ostcar d with you r mail ing add r ess to: Cinavia Consume r Info r mation Cen te r , P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA. Copyright 20 04-2009 Verance Corporation. Cin avia™ is a Verance Corpora tion trademark. Protec ted by U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and wo rldwide patents is sued and pending under license from Verance Corp oration. All rights reserved.  About audio formats The following audio fo r mats a r e su pp o r ted o n this p laye r: •D o l b y T r ueHD •D o l b y D i g i t a l P l u s •D o l b y D i g i t a l •D T S - H D M a s t e r Audio •D T S - H D H i g h R e s o l u t i o n A u d i o • DTS Digital Su rr ound •M P E G • MPEG-2 AAC •L i n e a r PC M To enjoy the su rr ound so und of Dolby T r ueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Maste r Audio and DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, it is r ecomm ended to connect the p layer to an AV r eceiver or amp lifie r comp atible with these audio fo r mats using an HDMI cable. Afte r loading a BD containing sound in one of these a udio fo r mats, select the audio fo r mat on the menu sc r een. See About the audio output settings on p age 52 fo r the out p ut condit ions of the d iffe r ent fo r mats. Manufactured under lice nse from Dolby Lab oratories. Dolby and t he double -D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under lice nse under U.S. Patent #’s : 5,451,94 2; 5,956,674 ; 5,974,38 0; 5,978,762 ; 6,226,61 6; 6,487,53 5; 7,392,195 ; 7,272,56 7; 7,333,929; 7,212,872 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered tradem ark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio | Essen tial are trademarks o f DTS, Inc. © 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Ri ghts Reserved.  Playing BDs • BDs (BDMV) com p ati ble with th e fo r mats below can be p layed. –B l u - r ay Disc Read-Only (ROM) For mat Ver sion 2 –B l u - r ay Disc Recor da ble (R) For mat Ver sion 2 –B l u - r ay Disc Rewr itable (R E) For mat Ver sion 3 This p laye r su pp o r ts BD-ROM P r ofile 2. BONUSVIEW functions suc h as p layback of seconda r y video (Pictu r e-in-Pictu r e) and seconda r y audio can be used. The data used with the BONUSVIEW functions (the seconda r y video (Pictu r e-in-Pictu r e) and seconda r y audio data) m ay be sto r ed in the stor age. Fo r details on seconda r y video and seconda r y audio p layback, r efe r to the disc’s inst r uctions. “BONUSVIEW” is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Association. BD-LIVE functions such as downloading movie t r aile r s o r additional audio and su btitle languages and p laying o n-line games can be enjoyed ove r th e Inte r net. The da ta downloaded with th e BD-LIVE function (t r ailer s, etc.) is sto r ed in the stor age. Ref e r to the disc’s inst r uc tions fo r deta ils about BD- LIVE functions. “BD-LIVE” logo is trad emark of Bl u-ray Disc Association. V6000_CUXJ_EN.bo ok 9 ページ ２００９年６ 月５日　金曜 日　午前１１ 時５７分
01 10 En With BD-ROM s, it is p ossible to use BD -J (Java) a pp lications to c r eate highly in te r active ti tles, fo r exam p le inclu ding gam es. Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or reg istered trademarks o f Sun Microsystem s, Inc. in the U.S. and othe r countries. The p layer ’s inter nal sto r age has a maximum cap acity of r oughly 1 GB. Use an exter nal sto r age connected to the USB po r t if yo u want to st o r e la r ge quantities of data ( p age 21). If a message saying the r e is not enough sto r age s p ace a pp ea r s, e r ase any unnecessa r y data ( p age 49). • BDs (BDAV) com p atible w ith the fo r mats below can be p layed. –B l u - r ay Disc Recor dable (R) For mat Ver sion 1 –B l u - r ay Disc Rewr itable (RE) For mat Ver sion 2  Playing DVDs This label indic ates playback co mpatibility with DVD- RW discs recorded in VR format (Video Recordin g format). However, for discs recorded with a record-only-once encrypted program, playbac k can only be achieved using a CPRM com patible de vice. The AVCHD is a high definition (HD) digital video came r a r ecor der fo r mat r ecor ding high-definition onto ce r tain media by using highly efficient codec technologies . “AVCHD” and t he “AVCHD” logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.  About region numbers Blu- r ay Disc Playe r and BD-ROM o r DVD-Video discs a r e assigned r egion numbe r s acco r ding to the r egion in which they a r e sold. This p laye r ’s r egion numbe r s a r e: •B D - R O M : A •D V D - V i d e o : 1 Discs not in cluding these n umbe r s cannot be p layed. Discs p layable on this p laye r a r e as shown below. • BDs: A (including A) and ALL • DVDs: 1 (including 1) and ALL  Playing CDs Rega r ding co p y pr otected CDs: This p layer is designed to confo r m to the s p ecificatio ns of the Audio CD fo r mat. This p laye r does not su pp o r t the p layback o r function of discs that do not confo r m to these s p ecifications.  DualDisc playback A DualDisc is a new two-side d disc, one side of which contains DVD content — video, au dio, etc. — while the othe r side contai ns non-DV D content s uch as digita l audio mate r ial. The DVD side of a DualD isc can be p layed on this p layer (excluding any DVD- Audio content). The non-DVD, au dio side of th e disc is not c om p atible with this p layer . It is p ossible that when loading o r ejecting a DualDisc, the o pp osite side to that being p layed will be sc r atched. Sc r atched discs may not be p layable. Fo r mo r e detailed info r mation on the DualDisc s p ecificatio n, p lease r efe r to the disc manufactu r er o r disc r e taile r .  Playing discs created on computers or BD/DVD recorders •I t m a y n o t b e p ossible to p lay discs r ecor ded using a com p ute r due to the a pp lication settings o r com p ute r ’s envi r onment settings. Reco r d discs in a fo r mat p layable on this p layer . For deta ils, co ntact the deale r . •I t m a y n o t b e p ossible to p lay discs r ecor ded using a com p ute r o r a BD/D VD r eco r de r , if bu r n qual ity is not good due to cha r acter istics of the disc, sc r atches, di r t on the disc, di r t on the r ecor der ’s lens, etc. Playable files Image and audio files r ecor ded on DVDs and CDs can be p layed. Caution • In DVD, only the one r eco r ded by the ISO 9660 file system can be p layed. • Some files may not be p layable. •F o r some f iles, it may not be p ossible to use cer tain functions du r ing p layback. • It may not be p ossible to p lay some files, even if they have the extension of a file p layable on this p layer . •F i l e s pr otected by DRM (Dig ital Rights Management ) cannot be p layed.  Supported image file formats • JPEG File fo r mat: JFIF Ve r . 1.02/Exif Ve r . 2.2 Resolution: U p to 4096 x 4096 p ixels Only baseline JPEG files a r e su pp o r ted. V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 10 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
11 En 01  Supported audio file formats • Windows Media ™ Audio 9 (WMA9) Bit r ate: U p to 192 kb p s Sam p ling f r equencies: 22.05 kHz, 32 kHz, 4 4.1 kHz and 48 kHz Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsof t Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. This product includ es technology owned by Micr osoft Corporation and cann ot be used or distributed w ithout a license from Microsof t Licensing, Inc. • MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3 ) Bit r ate: U p to 320 kb p s Sam p ling f r equencies: 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 1 2 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz  Playable file extensions • Image f iles .j p g and .j p eg • Audio files .wma and .m p 3 Part Names and Functions Remote Control 1  STA NDBY/ON – P r ess to tur n the p ower on and off. 2 TV CONT ROL – ( p age 24) 3 AUDIO – ( p age 31) 4S U B T I T L E – ( p age 30) 5 Number buttons – Use these to select and p lay the title/cha p te r /t r ack you want to view o r listen to and to select items f r om menus. CLEAR – P r ess to clear the numer ic number , etc. ENTER – P r ess to execute the selected item or enter a setting that has been changed, etc. 6 SE CONDARY AU DIO – ( p age 31 ) SECONDARY VIDEO – ( p age 31) STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER CLEAR ENTER VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN BD PLAYER PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT RED GREEN BLUE YELLOW VIDEO ADJUST INPUT SELECT TV CONTROL CH VOL AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION ENTER 10 7 8 4 12 13 1 2 3 5 6 9 11 14 18 20 17 19 21 15 16 22 23 V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 11 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
01 12 En 7 VIDEO SELECT – ( p age 26) 8 HOME MEDIA GALLERY – ( p age 36) 9T O P M E N U – P r ess to dis p lay the to p menu of the BD- ROM o r DVD-Video. 10  / / / – Use to select items, change settings and move the cu r sor . ENTER – P r ess to execute the selected item or enter a setting that has been changed, etc. 11 HOME MENU – ( p age 42) 12  PLAY – ( p age 29)  PAUSE – ( p age 29)  STOP – ( p age 29)  PREV/ NEXT – ( p age 30)  / / – ( p age 30) / /  – ( p age 30) 13 RED/GREEN/BLUE/YELLOW – Use these to navigate BD-ROM menus. 14 VIDEO ADJUST – ( p age 39) 15  OPEN/CLOSE – P r ess to op en and close the disc t r ay. 16 FL DIMMER – W hen pr essed, the b r ightness of the p layer ’s fr ont p anel disp lay and the status of the indicato r s on the p laye r ’s f r ont p ane l change s. 17 ANGLE – ( p age 30) 18 OUTPUT RESOLU TION – ( p age 27) 19 PLAY MO DE – ( p age 33) 20 POP UP MENU/MENU – P r ess to dis p lay th e BD- ROM o r DVD-Video menus. 21 DISPLA Y – ( p age 31) 22 TOOLS – ( p age 26) 23 RETURN – P r ess to r etur n to the pr evious sc r een. Front Panel 1  STA NDBY/ON – P r ess to tur n the p ower on and off. 2 FL OFF indicator – Lights when the p layer ’s f r ont p anel disp lay is tur ned off pr essing FL DIMMER . 3 /  – P r ess to skip to the beginning of the pr evious title/cha p ter /tr ack/file . Pr ess and hold to sta r t r eve r se scanning ( p age 30).  / – P r ess to skip to the beginning of the next title/cha p te r /t r ack/file . P r ess and hold to sta r t fo r war d scanning ( p age 30).  – P r ess dur ing p layback to p ause. Pr ess again to r estar t p layback.  – P r ess to stop p layback. 4 Remote control sensor – Point the r emote con t r ol to this, then o p e r ate it within a ppr oximately 23 feet (7 m) . The p layer may have tr ou ble cap tur ing r emote contr ol signals if the r e is a fluo r escent light nea r by. If this ha pp ens, move the p laye r away f r om the fl uo r escent light. 5 Disc tray 6 Blu -ray indicator – Lights when the p ower is tu r ned on. 7  OPEN/CLOSE – P r ess to op en and close the disc t r ay. 8 Front panel display 9 HDMI indicator – ( p age 18) 10  – P r ess to star t p layback. Front panel display Indicators Blu-ray FL OFF HDMI 1 1. This lights when an HDMI-com p atible device is connected to an HDMI OUT te r minal ( p age 18). B r ight B r ight Off Lit Medium B r ight Of f Lit Da r kD a r kO f f L i t Off Off Lit O ff 1 10 5 4 2 7 8 6 9 3 V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 12 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
13 En 01 Front Panel Display 1  – ( p age 29) 2  – ( p age 29) 3H D – This lights w hen an HDM I cable is c onnected and video signals a r e being out p ut with a r esolution of 1080/60i, 1080/60 p , 720/60 p, 1080/50i, 1080/50 p , 720/ 50 p o r 1080/24 p . It also lights when a com p onent video cable is connected and video sig nals a r e being out p ut with a r esolution of 1080/60i o r 720/60 p . 4L A N – ( p age 22) 5P Q L S – ( p age 19) 6 Charac ter display – Dis p lays the title/cha p ter /tr ack numbe r , ela p sed time, etc. 7 24HZ/50HZ/6 0HZ – The f r equency of the video f r ame o r field being out p ut lights. 8E X T – ( p age 21) 9C O N T R O L – ( p age 19) Rear Panel 1 AUDIO OUT (7.1 ch) termina ls – ( p age 21) 2 VIDEO OUT terminals VIDEO – ( p age 21) COMPONENT VIDEO – ( p age 21) 3A C I N – ( p age 22) 4 CONTROL IN terminal – Use to cont r ol this p layer f r om the r emote senso r of anothe r Pionee r com p onent with a CONTROL OUT te r minal and bea r ing th e  ma r k. Connect the CONT ROL OUT te r minal of the ot he r com p onent to CONTROL IN on this p laye r using a mini- p lug co r d (comme r cially available). Caution •B e s u r e to con nect cables for outp utting the a udio and video signals. • When connected via System Cont r ol, p oint the r emote contr ol towar d the connected comp onent (such as an AV r eceiver or am p li fie r ). T he r em ote will not wo r k co rr ectly when p ointed at this p layer . • You cannot use System Cont r ol with com p onents that do not have a System Con t r ol te r minal o r with com p onents manufac tu r ed by com p anies othe r than Pionee r . 5 DIGITAL OUT (OPTI CAL) terminal – ( p age 21) 6 HDMI OUT terminal – ( p age 20) 7U S B (BD ST ORAGE) port – ( p age 21) 8 LAN (100) terminal – ( p age 22) 9 RS-232C terminal – Se r ial cont r ol of the p layer is p ossible when connected to a com p uter (p age 58). PQLS LAN HD 24HZ 50HZ 60HZ CONTROL EXT 1 6 7 8 9 5 2 4 3 AUDIO OUT(7.1 ch) CONTROL IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SUB WOOFER L Y P B P R R L R LAN (100) HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL AC IN USB (BD STORAGE) RS-232C LAN (100) USB (BD STORAGE) HDMI OUT RS-232C DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL AUDIO OUT(7.1 ch) CONTROL IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SUB WOOFER L Y P B P R R L R AC IN 3 2 8 7 6 5 1 4 9 V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 13 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
02 14 En Chapter 2 Installation Cautions on use • Please note that Pionee r will acce p t no r esp onsib ility whatsoeve r fo r loss of business o pp o r tunities o r othe r damages due to b r eakdown of th e set. • Please note that Pionee r will acce p t no r esp onsib ility whatsoeve r fo r pr oblems r esulting fr om the use of the set, r ega r dless of the met hod of install ation. • Please note that Pionee r will acce p t no r esp onsib ility whatsoeve r fo r loss o f data r esulting f r om use o r b r eakdown of the set, o r fo r any di r ect o r indi r ect damages incu rr ed the r eby. Cautions on Installation Install and use the set in a l evel, stable p lace. Do not use it on shaky, unstable su r faces o r p laces subject to str ong vib r ations. The cu rr ent will su r ge if the p ower to sever al units of the set is tu r ned on o r off simultaneo usly f r om an exter nal device. Fo r the value p er unit, see Specifications on p age 75. Caution • When installin g the set in an EIA rac k, be su r e to use the includ ed r ack mount b r ackets. Usi ng anything else could cause damage to the set o r inju r y. Fo r details on mo unting, etc., see Installation Procedure on p age 16. • When the included r a ck mount b r acke ts a r e used, the p layer can be mo unted to univ e r sal p itch o r wide p itch r acks co nfo r ming to EIA 19" standa r ds. Place of installation Select a st able p lace nea r the TV and AV system to which the unit is connected. Do not p lace the p layer on to p of a TV o r colo r monito r . Kee p it away f r om ca ssette deck s o r othe r com p onents easily affected by magnetism. Avoid the foll owing ty p es of p laces: •P l a c e s e x p osed to dir ect sunlight or str ong ar tificial light • Places subject to vib r ation •P l a c e s e x p osed to str ong e lect r omagnetic o r magnetic fo r ces • Places in which the r e is much elect r ical noise • Places in which elect r ostatic noise tends to be gene r ated •H u m i d o r p oor ly venti lated p lace s •C l o s e d r acks •E x t r emely hot o r cold p laces • Places in which the r e is much dust o r ciga r ette smoke •P l a c e s e x p osed to soot, steam or heat (in kitchens, etc.)  Do not place objects on top Do not p lace objects on to p of the p layer .  Do not obstruct the ventilation holes Do not use the p layer on a sh aggy r ug, bed, o r sofa, and do not cove r th e p layer with a cloth, etc. Doing so will pr event heat dissi p ation and could lead to damage.  Keep away from heat Do not p lace the p layer on to p of an amp li fier or othe r device gene r ating heat. When installing in a r ack, to av oid the heat gene r ated by th e am p lifi er and oth e r devices, p lace it on a shelf b elow the a mp lifie r whenever p ossible. Caution • When installing the p layer , leave a s p ace of at least 10 cm between the p layer and th e wall. Also, to facilitate heat r adia tion, leave some sp ace between the p laye r and othe r equi p ment. Failu r e to do so will cause heat to build u p inside the p laye r , leading to fi r e. The p laye r should be used within a su rr ounding envi r onmental tem p er atu r e of 5 to 35 ° C and humidity of 85% o r less (witho ut obst r ucting the ventilation holes). Do not instal l in p oor ly ven tilated p lac es, p laces whe r e the humidity is too high o r in p laces exp osed to di r ect sunlight (o r st rong a r tifici al light). Rack mount bracket Screws removed from player V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 14 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
15 En 02 Moving the player If you need to move this unit, fi r st r emove the disc if the r e’s one loaded, and close th e disc t r ay. Next, pr ess  STANDBY/ON to sw itch the p ower to standby, checking th at the POWER OFF indication on th e f r ont p anel disp lay go es off. Wait at least 10 seconds. Lastly, disconnect the p ower co r d. Neve r lift o r mo ve the unit du r ing p layback — discs r otate at a high s p eed and may be damaged.  Transporting the set When t r ansp or ting the set, always use the box in whic h it was o r iginally p acked, being su r e not to dr op it or subject it to vib r ations o r shocks. Do not let the set be ex p osed to heat o r wate r du r ing t r ans po r tation. Be su r e to r emove any disc befo r e t r ansp or ting. T r ans po r ting the set with a disc in it could sc r at ch the disk o r damage the inside of the set. Also, disconnect cables. T r ansp o r ting with cables connect ed could damage the te r minals. Turn the power off when not using the player De p ending on the conditions of the TV b r oadc ast signals, st r ip ed p atter ns may a pp ear on the scr een when the TV is tu r ned on while the p laye r ’s p ower is tur ned on. This is not a malfunct ion with the p layer or TV. If this ha pp ens, tu r n the p laye r ’s p owe r off. In the same way, noise ma y be hea r d in the sound of a r adio. Condensation If the p layer is moved suddenly f r om a cold p lace into a wa r m r oom (in winte r , for exam p le) or if the temp er atur e in the r oom in which the p layer is installed r ises suddenly due to a heate r , etc., wate r d r op lets (condensation) ma y fo r m ins ide (on o p er ating p ar ts and the lens). When condensatio n is pr esent, the p layer will not o p er ate pr o pe r ly and p layback is not p ossible. Let the p laye r stand at r oom tem p er atu r e fo r 1 o r 2 h ou r s with the p owe r tu r ned on (the time de p en ds on the extent of condensation). The wate r dr o p lets wi ll dissi p ate and p layback wil l become p ossible. Condensation can also occu r in the summe r if the p laye r is ex p osed to the di r ect wind f r om an air -conditione r . If this ha pp ens, move the p layer to a dif fe r ent p lace . Cleaning the player No r mally, wi p e the p laye r with a soft cloth. Fo r to ugh di r t, a pp ly some neut r al dete r gent diluted in 5 to 6 pa r ts wate r to a soft cloth, w r ing out tho r oughly, wi p e o ff the di r t, then wi p e again with a d r y cloth. Note that g etting a lcohol, thinn e r , benzene o r in secticide on the p layer could cause the pr int and coating to p eel off. Also, avoid leaving r ubber or vinyl pr oducts i n contact with the p layer fo r lo ng p er iods of time, as this c ould damage the cabinet. When using che mical-im pr egnated wi p es, etc., r ead the wi p e’s cautions ca r efully. Un p lug the p owe r co r d f r om the powe r outlet wh en cleaning the p layer . Caution for wh en the unit is installed in a rack with a glass door Do not pr ess the  OPEN/CLOSE on the r emote cont r ol to o p en the disc t r ay while the glass doo r is c losed. The doo r will ham p er the movement of the disc t r ay, and the unit could be damaged. Cleaning the pickup lens The p laye r ’s lens sho uld not b ecome di r ty in no r mal use, but if fo r some r eason it should malfunction due to dust o r di r t, consult you r nea r est Pionee r autho r ized se r vice cente r . Although lens cleane r s fo r p laye r s a r e comme r cially availabl e, we advise against using them since some may damage the lens. Handling discs Do not use damaged (c r acked o r wa rp ed) discs. Do not sc r atch the disc’s signal su r fac e o r let it get di r ty. Do not load mo re than one disc into the p layer at a time. Do not glue p ap er or p ut sticke r s onto the disc, o r use a p encil, ball-p oint p en or other sha rp -ti pp ed wr iting inst r ument. These co uld all damage the disc.  Storing discs Always sto r e discs in thei r cases, and p lace the cases ve r tically, avoiding p laces ex p osed to high tem p er atu r e o r humidity, di rect sunlight o r ext r emely low tem p er atur es. Be su r e to r ead the cautions included with the disc.  Cleaning discs It may not be p ossible to p lay the disc if the r e a r e finge rpr ints o r dust on it. In this case, using a cleanin g cloth, etc., to wi p e the disc gently f r om the cente r towa r d the oute r edge. Do n ot use a di rty cleaning c loth. Do not use benzene, thinne r or othe r volatile chemicals. Also do not u se r ecor d s pr ay o r antistatic agents. Fo r tough di r t, a pp ly some wate r t o a s o f t c l o t h , w r ing out tho r oughly, wi p e off the di r t, then wi p e off the moistu r e with a d r y cloth. V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 15 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
02 16 En  Specially shaped discs S p ecially s ha p ed discs (hea r t-shap ed, hexagonal, etc.) cannot be used on this p laye r . Neve r use such discs, as they will damage the p layer .  Condensation on discs If the disc is moved suddenly f r om a c old p lace into a wa r m r oom (in winte r , fo r exam p le), wate r d r op lets (condensat ion) may fo r m on the disc su r face. Discs will not p lay pr o pe r ly if the r e is condensation on them. Ca r efull y wi p e off the wate r d r op lets f r om the disc su r face befo r e using the disc.  Extended use of recording discs Playing a s p ecific sect ion of a r ecor ding disc (BD-R/RE, DVD-R/RW, etc.) continuously fo r extended p er iods o f time may r educe p er for mance of the r ecor ded su r face and make the disc un p layable. To avoid this, take measu r es so that no single s p ecific sect ion is p layed for extended p er iods of time, and r ep lac e the disc p er iodically. Installation Procedure 1 Disconnect all cords connected to the set (including the power co rd). Befo r e sta r ting, check that th e r e is no disc in the set. 2 Turn the set upside-down, and remove the screws on the sides of the set. Remove the 2 sc r ews f r om each side. Caution • When mounti ng, be su r e to p lace the set on a stable su r face, such as on a flat table, and r aise the side of the set on wh ich you a r e mounting the r ac k mount b r acket by at least 10 m m. Mounting the r ack mo unt b r acket without r aising the set at least 10 mm could damage the set. • When moun ting the r ack mount b r acket, be su r e to use the sc r ews r emoved f r om the p layer . Using othe r sc r ews could damage the set o r r esult in the set falling. 3 Mount the rack mount brackets. Mount the r ack moun t b r ackets to the sc r ew ho les in t he sides of the p layer using the sc r ews r emoved f r om the p layer in step 2 (two scr ews on each side). •T h e r ack m ount br ackets ar e d if fe r ent fo r the left (L) and r ight (R) sides. Check the L and R ma r ks on th e r ack mount br ackets and be sur e to mount them on the co rr ect side. • When mounting, fi r st tighten the two sc r ews r emoved f r om the p laye r to the extent that the r ack mount b r acket moves when a gentle fo r ce is a pp lied , check that the r ack mount b racket is pr o pe r ly attached, then tighten the sc r ews secu r ely. Screw holes Rack mount bracket Screws removed from player V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 16 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
17 En 02 4 Mount the underplate. Inse r t the unde rp late between the lef t and r ight r ack mount b r ackets, then mount with the included g r ay sc r ew. 5 Mount the set on the rack. Check that the sc r ews fastened in ste p 3 a r e secu r ely tightene d. Caution •T h e r ack m ount br ackets included with the set allow the set to be mounted on unive r sal p itch or wide p itch r acks confor ming to EIA 19” standa r ds. • Check that the r ack ha s the a ppr o pr iate st r ength fo r the set’s weight and usage envi r onment befo r e mounting. •T h e * s c r ews for fixing the r ack mount b r ackets t o the r ack ar e not included. Choo se scr ews with the a ppro pr iate st r ength and length fo r the set’s weight and usage envi r onmen t to mount t he set on the r ack. To ensu r e that the set is fixed secu r ely on the r ac k, be su r e to fasten it with sc r ews in all 4 r ack mount sc r ew holes. • The mounting pr ocedu r e sh ould be p er for med by at least two p eop le. • Be ve r y ca r eful not to get you r finge r s, etc., caught between the r ack mount b r ackets and the r ack. 6 Check that the screws fastene d in step 5 are securely tightened. Once this is checked, the pr ocedu r e is finished. •I f t h e r e is a ny looseness in the scr ews * or the scr ews r emoved fr om the p layer , vibr ations gener ated by the r otation of dis cs in the p la yer or by other pr oducts could cause noise o r to lead the p la yer falling off the r ack, r esulting in injur y or damage to the eq ui p ment. Be su r e to ch eck that the s c r ews a r e secu r ely fastened. Caution • Pay attention to the following when r emoving the set f r om the r ack and movi ng it: –B e s u r e to r emove any disc fr om the set. –T u r n the set’s p ower off, then disconnect connected cables , etc. –B e c a r eful that the set does not fall when loosening the sc r ews fastening it to the r ack (the pr ocedu r e should be p er for med by at least two p eop le). –A f t e r r emoving the set fr om the r ack, be sur e to p lace it on a stab le sur face, such as on a flat table. Underplate Included gray screw Set Rack (conforming to EIA standards) Rack mount screw holes * screws * screws Rack mount bracket V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 17 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
03 18 En Chapter 3 Connecting up Be su r e to tu r n off the p ower and un p lug the p ower co r d f r om the p owe r outlet whenev e r making o r changi ng connections. Afte r connecting, make the settings a t the Setup Navigator menu acco r ding to the ty p e of cable connected ( p age 23). Also r efer to the op er ating instr uctions of the device being connected. Connecting using an HDMI cable The audio and v ideo signals can be t r ansfe rr ed to HDMI- com p atible devices as digital signal s with no loss of sound o r video quality. Note • Make the settings at the Setup Navigator menu acco r ding to connected HDM I-com p atible devi ce ( p age 23). •T h e HDMI indicator on the p layer ’s f r ont p anel lights when an HDMI-com p atible device i s connected to an HDMI OUT te r minal ( p age 12). • 1080 p video si gnals ma y not be o ut p ut, de p ending on the HDMI cable being used. About HDMI This p laye r inco rp o r ates High-Defin ition Multimed ia Inte r face (HDMI™) technology. HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High -Definition Mult imedia Interface are trademarks or re gistered tradem arks of HDMI Licensing, LLC. The p laye r su pp o r ts Dee p Colo r. The conventional p layer s can t r ansmit a video signal with 8 bit co lo r de p th in the YCbC r 4:4:4 o r RGB fo r mats, the p layer s su pp or ting Deep Color can t r ansmit a video signal with a colo r bit de p th of g r eater than 8 bits p er colo r com p onent. Subtle colo r g r adatio ns can be r e pr oduced when connected to a TV that su pp or ts Deep Colo r . This pr oduct is co m p atible with “x.v.Colo r ” that have th e ca p abil ity to r ealize a wide-gamu t colo r sp ace based on the xvYCC s p ecifications. Playing video si gnals confo r ming to “xvYCC” standa r ds on this p layer when connected to an “x .v.Colo r ”- com p atible TV, etc., ex p ands colo r r e pr oducti on ca p abilitie s, allowing natu r al colo r s to be r e pr oduced mo r e faithfully than eve r . “x.v.Colo r ” is a pr omotio n name given to the pr oducts that have the ca p ability to r ealize a wide-gam ut colo r sp ac e based on the inte r nati onal standa r d s p ecification s defined as xvYCC. “x.v.Color” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation.  Audio signals that can be transferred with the player’s HDMI OUT terminal •D o l b y T r ueHD •D o l b y D i g i t a l P l u s •D o l b y D i g i t a l •D T S - H D M a s t e r Audio • DTS-HD High Resolution Audi o • DTS Digita l Su rr ound • MPEG-2 AAC •L i n e a r PCM Linea r PCM audio signals meeting the following conditions can be out p ut: –S a m p ling fr equency: 32 kHz to 192 kHz –N u m b e r of channels: Up to 8 (up to 6 for a 192 kHz sam p lin g f r equency) Fo r details, see About the audio o utput settings on p age 52.  About the HDMI High Speed Transmission This p laye r out p uts 1080/60 p , 1080/50 p and Dee p Co lo r video signals. If you r TV su pp o r ts 108 0/60 p , 1080/50 p o r Dee p Colo r signals, use a High S p eed HD MI™ cable in o r de r to take advantage of the max imum pe r fo r man ce the p layer and TV can o ffe r . Also set HDMI High Speed Transmission to On ( p age 44). High S p eed HDMI™ cables a r e tested to ca rr y signals u p to 1080 p . 1080/60i, 108 0/60 p , 720/60 p , 1080/24 p , 1080/50i, 1080/50 p and 720/50 p video signals th at a r e ca p able of Dee p Colo r can also be c a rr ied. Note •S e t HDMI High Speed Transmissio n to Off when using an HDMI cable othe r than a High S p ee d HDMI™ ca ble (a Standa r d HDMI™ cab le). V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 18 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
19 En 03 • The follow ing r estr ictions a pp ly when HDMI High Speed Transmission is s et to Off : –D e e p Color signals ar e not outp ut. –I f t h e o u t p ut video r esolution is set to Auto , the signals a r e out p ut with a r esolution of 1080/60i o r 1080/50i when TV’s pr efe rr ed r esolution is 1080/60p o r 1080/50 p. – When the out p ut video r esolution is set to 480i/576i o r 480 p /576 p , Dolby T r ueHD and DTS-HD Maste r Audio audio signals a r e out put as Dolby Digital, DTS Digital Su rr ound o r linea r PCM signals. 96 kHz o r 192 kHz multi-channel audio signals a r e out p ut as linea r PCM 2-channel audio s ignals ( p age 52). • When an HDMI cable with a built-in eq ualize r is connected, it may not o p er ate pr op er ly.  When connected to a DVI device • It is not possible to connec t DVI de vices (computer displays, for ex ample) that are not compatible wi th HDCP. HDCP is a s p ecification to pr otect audiovis ual content a c r oss the DVI/HDMI inte r face. • No audio signals a r e out p ut. Connect using an audio cable, etc. •T h i s p layer is designed for connectio n with HDMI- com p atible devices. When co nnected to a DVI device, it may not o p er ate pr op er ly de p ending on the DVI device. About KURO LINK function The functions listed below wo r k when a Pionee r KURO LINK-com p atible Flat Panel TV o r AV system (AV r ece iver o r am p lifie r , etc.) is connected to the p laye r using an HDMI cable. Functions operated fro m the TV Such p layer o p er ations as star ting and sto pp ing p layback and dis p laying the menus can be p er for med f r om the Flat Panel TV. Auto-select function The in p ut switches automatically on the Flat Panel TV and AV system (AV r eceiver or am p lifier, etc.) when p layback is sta r ted on the p layer o r the Home Menu o r Home Media Galle r y is dis p layed. When the in p ut is switched, the p layback p ictur e, th e Home Me nu o r Home Media Galle r y a pp ea r s o n the Flat Panel TV. Simul taneous power functi on When p layback on the p la yer is star te d or the Home Menu o r Home Media Galle r y is dis p layed, if the Flat Panel TV’s p ower was off, its p ower tur ns on automatically. When the Flat Panel TV’s p ower is tu r ned off, th e p layer ’s p ower automa tically tu r ns off. Unified lang uage function When the language info r mation f r om a conn ected Flat Panel TV is r eceived, you can have the p layer’s o n-sc r een dis p lay language change automatically to that of the Flat Panel TV. This function is availabl e only when p layback is sto pp ed and the menu sc r een is not dis p layed. Caution •A l s o r efe r to the op er ating instr uctions of the Fla t Panel TV and AV system (AV r eceiver or am p lifier , etc.). Note • CO NTROL on the p la ye r ’s f r ont p anel dis p lay lig hts when the KURO LINK function is activated ( p age 13).  To use the KURO LINK function • The KURO LINK func tion only wo r ks wh en out p utting video signals f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal . • The KURO LINK function wo r ks when KURO LINK is set to On on the p layer (p age 44). • The KURO LINK f unction o p er a t es w h e n K U R O LI N K is set to On fo r all devices connected with HDMI cables. Once connections and the settings of all the devices a r e finished, be su r e to check that the p laye r ’s p ictur e is outp ut to the Flat Panel TV. (Al so check afte r changing th e connected de vices and r econnecting HDMI cables.) The KURO LINK func tion may not o pe r ate pro pe r ly if the p laye r ’s p ictu r e is not pro pe r ly out p ut to th e Flat Panel TV . •U s e H i g h S p eed HDMI™ cables when using the KURO LINK function. The KURO LINK function may not o p er ate pr op er ly if othe r HDMI cables a r e u sed. •F o r so me models, the KURO LINK function may be r efe rr ed to as “HDM I Contr ol”. •T h e S i m u l t a n e o u s p ower functi on is activat ed when the p laye r is set as follows ( p age 44): Display Power On : On Display Power Off : On  About PQLS function The PQLS (P r ecision Qu ar tz Lock System) is a tr ansfer cont r ol technolo gy using the KURO LINK function . The p layer ’s outp ut signals ar e contr olled fr om the AV r eceiver or amp lifi er to achieve high quality sound p layback using the quar tz oscillator of AV r eceiver or am p lifie r . Th is eliminates the influence of the jitte r gene r ated u p on tr ansfe r which can adve r sely affect the sound quality. •T h e p layer su pp or ts the “P QLS 2ch Audio” function that is only activated w hen p laying aud io CDs (CD- DAs), and the “PQLS Multi Su rr ound” function that is activated when p laying all discs (BDs , DVDs, etc.) with audio out p ut i n linea r PC M. • The “PQLS 2ch Au dio” function is on ly activated when a Pionee r AV r eceiver o r am p li fier com p atibl e with the “PQLS 2 ch Audio” function is connec ted di r ectly to the p laye r ’s HDMI OUT te r minal using an HDMI cable, and when the p layer is set as follows ( p age 44): KURO LINK : On PQLS : Auto • The “PQLS Multi Su rr ound” functi on is only ac tivated when a Pionee r AV r eceiver or amp lifie r com p atible with the “PQLS Multi Su rr ound” function is connected di r ectly to the p layer ’s HDMI OUT V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 19 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
03 20 En te r minal using an HDMI cable, and when the p laye r is set as follows ( p age 44): HDMI Audio Out : PCM KURO LINK : On PQLS : Auto •A l s o r efer to the op er ating instr uctions of AV r eceiver o r am p lifie r. • Please see the Pionee r website fo r AV r eceiver s o r am p lifie r s th at su pp o r t the PQLS function. Caution •I f t h e o u t p ut video r esolution is switched, the PQLS function may not wo r k. The function will wo r k again once p layback has been sto pp ed then r esta r ted. Note • PQLS on the p laye r ’s f r ont p anel dis p lay lights when the PQLS func tion is activat ed ( p age 13).  About connections to components of other makes supporting the KURO LINK function The functions listed below wo r k when a TV o r AV syste m (AV r eceive r o r amp lifi e r , etc.) su pp o r ting the p laye r ’s KURO LIN K function is con nected to the p layer using an HDMI cable. (De p ending on you r TV o r A V system (AV r eceiver or amp li fier , etc.), it cou ld ha pp en that not all of the functions will wo r k.) • Functions o p er ated f r om the TV • Auto-select function • Simultaneous p owe r function • Unified language fun ction Please see the P ionee r website fo r the latest in fo r mation on b r ands and model numbe r s of othe r br ands t hat su pp o r t the KU RO LINK fu nction. Connecting a TV See Connecting an AV re ceiver or amplifie r below to connect an AV r eceiver o r am p lifier using an HDMI cable. Caution •H o l d t h e p lug when connecting and disconnecting the cable. •P l a c i n g a l o a d o n t h e p lu g could r esult in faulty contact and no video signals being out p ut. Connecting an AV receiver or amplifier Connect to an AV r eceiver or am p lifier in o r der to enjoy the su rr ound soun d of Dolby T r ueHD, Dolb y Digita l Plus, Dolby Digital, DTS-HD Maste r Audio, DTS-HD High Resolutio n Audio o r DTS Digital Su rr o und. Fo r inst r uctions on connec ting the TV and s p eake r s to the AV r eceiver o r amp lifier , r efer to the op er ating instr uctions of AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r . Caution •H o l d t h e p lug when connecting and disconnecting the cable. •P l a c i n g a l o a d o n t h e p lu g could r esult in faulty contact and no video signals being out p ut. AUDIO OUT(7.1 ch) CONTROL IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SUB WOOFER L Y P B P R R L R LAN (100) HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL USB (BD STORAGE) RS-232C LAN (100) USB (BD STORAGE) HDMI OUT RS-232C DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL AUDIO OUT(7.1 ch) CONTROL IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SUB WOOFER L Y P B P R R L R Playe r ’s r ea r p anel TV Match th e di r ection of the p lug to the ter minal and inse r t st r aight. To HDMI in p ut te r minal HDMI cable (comme r cially available) It is also p ossible to connect to an AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r using an HDMI cable (below). Di r ection of signal flow AUDIO OUT(7.1 ch) CONTROL IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SUB WOOFER L Y P B P R R L R LAN (100) HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL USB (BD STORAGE) RS-232C LAN (100) USB (BD STORAGE) HDMI OUT RS-232C DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL AUDIO OUT(7.1 ch) CONTROL IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SUB WOOFER L Y P B P R R L R Playe r ’s r ea r p anel To HDMI in p ut te r minal F r om HDMI out p ut te r minal AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r To HDMI in p ut te r minal TV HDMI cable (comme r cially available) Match the di r ection of the p lug to the te r minal and inse rt st r aight. Di r ection of signal flow HDMI cable (comme r cially available) V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 20 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
21 En 03 Connecting video and audio cables Note • Make the settings in the Setup Navigator menu acco r ding to the ty p e of cable connected ( p age 23). •T o o u t p ut video signals fr om this p layer , connect using one of the following (not includi ng when connected using an HDMI cable): a com p onent video cable o r a video ca ble. Connecting a TV using a video/audio cable Caution • Connect the player’s video ou tput directly to your TV. This p laye r su pp o r ts analog co p y pr otection technology . The r efor e the p ictur e ma y not be dis p layed pr o pe r ly if connected to a TV via a DVD r ecor der /video deck or when p laying the p layer ’s out p ut mate r ial that is r eco r ded by a DVD reco r de r / video deck. Fu r ther mor e, the p ictur e ma y not be dis p layed pr o pe r ly d ue to the co p y pr otection when the p laye r is conne cted to a TV w ith a built -in video deck. Fo r details, contact the manufactu r e r of you r TV. Note •V i d e o s i g n a l s a r e out p ut with a r esolution of 480/6 0i o r 576/50i when connected using a video cable. • When connected to the TV using a com p onent video cable, video signals a r e not out p ut with a resolutio n of 1080/60 p , 1080/24 p 1080/50i, 1080/50 p o r 720/50 p . •D e p ending on the outp ut video r esolution setting, the p ictur e may not be outp ut (p age 27). Connecting an AV receiver or amplifier using audio cables When connecting to a 7.1-channel compati ble AV receiver or ampl ifier – Connect using 4 audio cables (diag r am below). When connecting to a 5.1-channel compati ble AV receiver or ampli fier – Connect using 3 au dio cables (do not connect to the su rr ound back left and r ight te r minals). • To switch the video f r om the AV r eceiver or am p li fier , also conne ct the video ou t p ut te r min als. •A f t e r connecting, set Audio Output Mode to Multi- channel ( p age 43). Note • To connect to the 2-channel a udio in p ut te r minals on a TV, etc., connect to FRONT (L/R) . Connecting components to the USB port The data downloaded with th e BD-LIVE function and the data used wit h the BONU SVIEW funct ion when p laying BD-ROMs can be sto r ed on a device connected to the USB po r t (exte r nal sto r age). About USB (external storage) devices The USB (exte r nal sto r age) devices that can be connected to the p layer ar e as shown below. •U S B 2 . 0 - c o m p at ible memor y devices or har d disks • FAT16 o r FAT32 file system, minimum 1 GB ca p acity (2 GB o r mo r e r ecommended) AUDIO OUT(7.1 ch) CONTROL IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SUB WOOFER L Y P B P R R L R AUDIO OUT(7.1 ch) CONTROL IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SUB WOOFER L Y P B P R R L R TV Playe r ’s r ea r p anel To com p onent video in p ut te r minals A com p onent cable o r th r ee comme r cially available video cables can be used instead of the video cable (yellow p lug) of the included video/audio cable fo r connection. Di r ection of signal flow Red White It is also p ossible to connect to an AV r eceiver or am p lifier . Connect the audio signals using audio cables (7.1 channels) o r an o p tical digital audio cable (below). To video/audio in p ut te r minals Video/audio cable (included) Yellow AUDIO OUT(7.1 ch) CONTROL IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SUB WOOFER L Y P B P R R L R DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL AUDIO OUT(7.1 ch) CONTROL IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SUB WOOFER L Y P B P R R L R Playe r ’s r ea r p anel To multi-channel audio in p ut te r minals AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r Video/audio cable (included) Red White Audio cable (comme r cially available) Di r ection of signal flow An o p tical digital audio cable (comme r cially available) can also be used fo r connection. To o p tical digital audio in p ut te r minal Audio cable (comme r cially available) Audio cable (comme r cially available) V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 21 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
03 22 En Note • Devices fo r matted with a file system othe r than the above cannot be used. Such devices may howeve r be usable if they a r e fo r matted f r om the p layer . •E x t e r nal stor age devices m ay not be r ecognized if they contain multi p le p ar titions. • Some exte r nal st o r age devices may not o p er ate with this p laye r . •O p er ation of exter na l stor age devi ces (USB memo r y devices, exte r nal ha r d disks, etc.) is not gua r anteed. Connecting the USB (external storage) device Caution •B e s u r e to tu r n the p layer ’s p ower off b efor e connecting o r disconnecting exte r nal sto r age devices. •U s e e m p ty exter nal stor age devices (on which nothing is sto r ed). • When using an e xte r nal ha r d disk as the exte r nal sto r age device, be su r e to tu r n on the ha r d disk’s p ower befor e tur ning on the p layer ’s p ower . •I f t h e e x t e r nal stor age device is wr ite- pr otected, be su r e to disable the w r ite- pr otection. • When connecting the USB cable, hold onto the p lug, set the p lug in the pr o pe r di rection fo r the p or t and ins e r t it ho r izontally. • Placing excessive loads on the p lug may r esult in p oor contact, making it imp ossible to wr ite data on the exte rnal sto r age de vice. •T h e p layer is equi pp ed with an inter nal stor age. This inte r nal sto r age cannot be used when an ex te r nal sto r age device is connected. •W h e n a U S B m e m o r y device or exter nal har d disk is connected and the p layer ’s p ower is tu r ned on, do not un p lug the p owe r co r d. Note •T h e EXT in dicato r on the p layer ’s fr ont p anel disp lay lights when data can be sto r ed on the exte r nal sto r age ( p age 13). • Devices may not wo r k i f connected to the USB p or t via a memo r y ca r d r eader o r USB hub. • Use a USB cable with a length of 2 mete r s o r less. Network connection BD-LIVE functions such as downlo ading movie t r ailer s o r additional audio and subtitle languages and p laying on-line games can be enjoyed ove r the Inte r net. The p layer ’s softwa r e can also be u p dated over the Inter ne t ( p age 51). Connect an Ethe r net hub (o r a r ou te r with hub functionali ty) that is co nnected to th e Inte r net to the p layer . Be su r e to use a 100BASE-TX com p atible Ethe r net hub o r r outer . Connecting via an Ethernet hub The p laye r can be connected to an Ethe r net hub using a LAN cable. Note • LAN on the p laye r ’s f r ont p anel dis p lay li ghts when the r e is an active local a r ea netwo r k (LAN) connec tion ( p age 13). •I f t h e r e is an available DHCP se r ver in your local ar ea netwo r k, the I P add r ess is obtained automatically. Othe r wise, set IP add r ess manually ( p age 48). •F o r some Inter net ser vice pr ovider s, you may have to set the individual netwo r k configu r ation manua lly. In this case, see p age 48. •P i o n e e r is not r esp onsible for any m alfunction of the p layer due to communication e rr or /malfunctions associated with you r netwo r k connection and/o r you r connected equi p ment. Please con ta ct you r Inte r net se r vice pr ovide r o r netwo r k device manufactu r er . Connecting the power cord Connect the p ower co r d afte r all the connections between devices have been com p let ed. AUDIO OUT(7.1 ch) CONTROL IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SUB WOOFER L Y P B P R R L R LAN (100) HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL USB (BD STORAGE) RS-232C LAN (100) USB (BD STORAGE) HDMI OUT RS-232C DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL AUDIO OUT(7.1 ch) CONTROL IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO FRONT SURROUND SURROUND BACK COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SUB WOOFER L Y P B P R R L R USB memo r y device, etc. USB cable (comme r cially available) Ha r d disk, etc. Playe r ’s r ea r p anel AUDIO OUT(7.1 ch) CONTROL IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO FRONT SURROUND SURR COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SUB W L Y P B P R R LAN (100) HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL USB (BD STORAGE) RS-232C LAN (100) USB (BD STORAGE) HDMI OUT RS-232C DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL AUDIO OUT(7.1 ch) CONTROL IN VIDEO OUT VIDEO FRONT SURROUND SURR COMPONENT VIDEO CENTER SUB W L Y P B P R R 1 LAN 2 3 WAN LAN cable (comme r cially available) Ethe r net hub ( r oute r with hub functionality) Modem Inte r net Playe r ’s r ea r p anel O OUT(7.1 ch) SURROUND SURROUND BACK O CENTER SUB WOOFER Y P B P R L R AC IN O OUT(7.1 ch) SURROUND SURROUND BACK O CENTER SUB WOOFER Y P B P R L R AC IN Playe r ’s rea r p anel Powe r co r d (included) To wall o utlet V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 22 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
23 En 04 Chapter 4 Getting Started Making settings using the Setup Navigator menu Be su r e to p er for m these settings when using the p layer fo r the fi r st time . Caution •B e f o r e tur ning on th e p ower , check that the connections between the p layer and othe r devices a r e co rr ect. Also, tu r n on the p owe r of the devices connected to the p la yer befo r e tu r ning on the p layer ’s p ower . •T h e s c r ee n in step 11 and test tones ar e outp ut simultaneously acco r d ing to the se ttings in ste p s 4 to 7. Lowe r the volume of the devices connected with the p layer . Note •B y f a c t o r y default, the KURO LINK functio n is not activated. To activate the KURO LINK function using Setu p Navigato r , KURO LINK is set to On on th e p layer (p age 44), and if a Pionee r KURO LINK- com p at ible Flat Panel TV is connect ed, tu r n on the TV's KURO LINK function. •W h e n a P i o n e e r Flat Panel TV or fr ont pr ojector com p atible with the KURO LINK function is connect ed to the p la ye r using an HDMI cable, the p layer is automatically set to the op timum p ictur e quality fo r th e connected device. 1 Turn on the TV’ s power and switch the input. See the TV’s o p er ating inst ruction s fo r inst r uctions on o pe r ating the TV. 2 Turn on the pl ayer’s power. P r ess  STANDBY/ON. Check that the Setup Navigator menu is dis p layed.  If the Setup Navigator menu is not displayed  Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu, sel ect Initi al Setup  Setup Navigator  Start, then press ENTER. 3 Selec t the OSD language. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . When a Pionee r Flat Panel TV that is com p atible with KURO LINK is connected to this p layer ’s HD MI OUT te r minal, lan guage setting s a r e im p or ted f r om the Pionee r Flat Panel TV’s langu age settings befo r e Setu p Navigator begins. 4 Selec t and set the video and audio o utput terminals. Select the actually connected video and audio out p ut te r minals. Use  / / /  to select, then pr ess ENTER . Caution • When HDMI is selected fo r Video , no video signals a r e out p ut f r om the COMPON ENT VIDEO o r VIDEO out p ut te r minals. • When COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO is selected at Vi deo , no video sign als a r e out put f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal. • The video and audio signals out p ut f r om the set out p ut te r minals a r e out p ut synch r onousl y (li p synch r onization). • When COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO is selected at Video , no sound is out p ut if HDMI is selected at Audio . Follow the pr ocedu r e below to r edo the connections, then select the pr o pe r connection at the setu p sc r een. TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Setting item Output terminal name Video HDMI HDMI OUT COMPONENT VIDEO VIDE O OUT COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO Audio HDMI HDMI OUT DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL OUT ANALOG AUDIO AUDIO OUT Setup Navigator BD PLAYER Please select the on-screen display language. Audio, subtitle and BDMV/DVD- Video menu language will also be set. V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 23 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
04 24 En – When con necting using com p onent video cables o r a video cable to watch the p ictur e, connect to a n AV r eceiver o r amp lifier , or a TV using either ana log audio cables (7.1 chan nels o r 2 channels), an o p tical digital audio cable ( p age 21). – To listen to audio with the p layer connected to an AV r eceive r o r amp lifie r with an HDMI cable, connect the TV to the AV r eceiver o r am p li fier using an HDMI cable ( p age 20). •W h e n HDMI o r DIGITAL AUDIO is selected at Audio , linea r PCM au dio signals (2 channel s) a r e out p ut f r om all te r minals othe r than the ones selected at Audio . •W h e n ANA LOG AUDIO is selected at Audio , no audio signals a r e out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT o r DIG ITAL OU T te r minal s. For steps 5 to 8, the step to which you should proceed depends on the comb ination of the Video and Audio settings. 5 Sele ct and set the HDMI High Speed Transmission setting for the HD MI OUT terminal. Use  / to select , then pr ess ENTER . When HDMI High Speed T ransmission fo r the HDMI OUT te r minal is set to On , use a High S p eed HDMI™ cable. The p ictur e and sound may not be out p ut pr o pe r ly if any othe r HDMI cable (fo r exam p le a standa r d HDMI™ cable) o r an HDMI cable with built-in equalize r is used. 6 Select the output vi deo resolution from the COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . Fo r details on the r esolution settings, see Switching the output video resol ution on p age 27. 7 Select the aspect ratio of your TV. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 8 Select the PQLS. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTE R . Note • Only when a Pionee r AV r eceiver or am p lifier is connected , PQLS Sc r een a pp ea r s. • The PQLS function wo r ks when linea r PCM audio signals a r e out p ut. The r efor e the linea r PCM audio signals obta ined by deco ding all au dio signals a r e out p ut f r om HDMI OUT te r minal. Fo r details , see About the audio output settings on p age 52. •W h e n Use is select, the p layer is set to the settings below. HDMI Audio Out : PCM KURO LINK : On PQLS : Auto •F o r detail s on th e PQLS f unction, About PQLS function on p age 19. 9 Check the settings. Select Proceed , then pr ess ENTER . 10 Output test tones. Use  / to sele ct Yes , then pr ess ENTER . 11 Finish the Setup Navigator menu. Use  / to sele ct Finish , then pr ess ENTER . To r edo the settings f r om the sta r t, select Go Back . De p ending on the out p ut te r minal setting of ste p 4 or the HDMI cable b eing used, it may ha pp en th at no p ictur e and/o r sound is out p ut. If this ha pp ens, the setu p r etur ns to ste p 4 if the r e is no o p er ation fo r ove r 30 seconds. Once the setu p r etur ns to step 4, r edo the settings accor ding to the connected devices and the HDM I cable being used. 12 Checki ng the p icture qu ality sett ings or se tting the picture quality. If a Pionee r Flat Panel TV o r pr ojector is connected to the p layer and HDMI is selected for Video in step 4, the p la ye r sets the p ictu r e quality au tomatically. The automatic p ictu r e quality setting sc r een a pp ea r s. P r ess ENTER . When the automatic p ictur e qu ality sett ing sc r een does not a pp ea r , the manual p ict ur e quality setting sc r een a pp ea r s. U se /  to select the connected com p onent, then pr ess ENTER . Operating the TV with the player’s remote control When the manufactu r er co de fo r you r b r and of TV is set on the p layer ’s r emote con t r ol, the TV can be o p er ated using the p layer ’s r em ote cont r ol. Caution •F o r some models it may not be p ossible to op er ate the TV with the p layer ’s r emote cont r ol, even fo r TVs of b r ands listed on the manufac tu re r code list. • The settings may be r estor ed to th e facto r y defaults when batte r ies a r e r ep laced. If this ha pp ens, set u p the settings again. 1 Input the 2- digit manufacturer code. P r ess the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to in p ut the code while pr essing TV CONTROL  . TV CONTROL STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER ENTER INPUT SELECT CH VOL AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 24 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
25 En 04 Note •T h e f a c t o r y setting is 00 (PIONEER). • If you make a mistake when in p utting th e code, r elease TV CONTROL  then star t over fr om the beginning. •W h e n t h e r e ar e multip le cod es for a manu factur er , tr y in p utting them in th e indicat ed o r de r u ntil the TV can be o p er ated. 2 Chec k that the TV can be operated. O pe r ate th e TV using TV CONTROL.  – P r ess to tur n the TV’s p ower on and off. INPUT SELECT – P r ess to switch the TV’s in p ut . CH /– – P r ess to select the TV channel. VOL /– – P r ess to adjust the volume. TV Preset code list Manufacturer Code(s) PIONEER 00, 31, 32, 07, 36, 42, 51, 22 ACURA 44 ADMIRAL 31 AIWA 60 AKAI 32, 35, 42 AKURA 41 ALBA 07, 39, 41, 44 AMSTRAD 42, 44, 47 ANITECH 44 ASA 45 ASUKA 41 AUDIOGONIC 07, 36 BASIC LINE 41, 44 BAUR 31, 07, 42 BEKO 38 BEON 07 BLAUPUNKT 31 BLUE SKY 41 BLUE STAR 18 BPL 18 BRANDT 36 BTC 41 BUSH 07, 41, 42, 44, 47, 56 CASCADE 44 CATHAY 07 CENTURION 07 CGB 42 CIMLINE 44 CLARIVOX 07 CLATRONIC 38 CONDOR 38 CONTEC 44 CROSLEY 32 CROWN 38, 44 CRYSTAL 42 CYBERTRON 41 DAEWOO 07, 44, 56 DAINICHI 41 DANSAI 07 DAYTON 44 DECCA 07, 48 DIXI 07, 44 DUMONT 53 ELIN 07 ELITE 41 ELTA 44 EMERSON 42 ERRES 07 FERGUSON 07 , 36, 51 FINLANDIA 35, 43, 54 FINLUX 32, 07, 45, 48, 53, 54 FIRSTLINE 40, 44 FISHER 32, 35, 38, 45 FORMENTI 32, 07, 42 FRONTECH 31, 42, 46 FRONTECH / PROTECH 32 FUJITSU 48 FUNAI 40, 46, 58 GBC 32, 42 GE 00, 01, 08, 07, 10, 11, 17 , 02, 28, 18 GEC 07, 34, 48 GELOSO 32, 44 GENERAL 29 GENEXXA 31, 41 GOLDSTAR 10, 23, 21, 02, 07 , 50 GOODMANS 07, 39, 47, 48, 56 GORENJE 38 GPM 41 GRAETZ 31, 42 GRANADA 07, 35, 42, 43, 48 GRADIENTE 30, 57 GRANDIN 18 GRUNDIG 31, 53 HANSEATIC 07, 42 HCM 18, 44 HINARI 07, 41, 44 HISAWA 18 HITACHI 31, 33, 34, 36, 42, 43, 54 , 06, 10, 24, 25, 18 HUANYU 56 HYPSON 07, 18, 46 ICE 46, 47 IMPERIAL 38, 42 INDIANA 07 INGELEN 31 INTERFUNK 31, 32, 07, 42 INTERVISION 46, 49 ISUKAI 41 ITC 42 ITT 31, 32, 42 JEC 05 JVC 13, 23 KAISUI 18, 41, 44 KAPSCH 31 KENDO 42 KENNEDY 32, 42 KORPEL 07 KOYODA 44 LEYCO 07, 40, 46, 48 LIESENK & TTER 07 LOEWE 07 LUXOR 32, 42, 43 M - ELECTR ONIC 31, 44 , 45, 54, 56, 07, 36, 51 MAGNADYNE 32, 49 MAGNAFON 49 MAGNAVOX 07, 10, 03, 12, 29 MANESTH 39, 46 MARANTZ 07 MARK 07 MATSUI 07, 39, 40, 42, 44, 47, 48 MCMICHAEL 34 MEDIATOR 07 MEMOREX 44 METZ 31 MINERVA 31, 53 MITSUBISHI 09, 10, 02, 21, 31 MULTITECH 44, 49 NEC 59 NECKERMANN 31, 07 NEI 07, 42 NIKKAI 05, 07, 41, 46, 48 NOBLIKO 49 NOKIA 32, 42, 52 NORDMENDE 32, 36, 51, 52 OCEANIC 31, 32, 42 ORION 32, 07, 39, 40 OSAKI 41, 46, 48 OSO 41 OSUME 48 OTTO VERSAND 31, 32, 07, 42 PALLADIUM 38 PANAMA 46 PANASONIC 31, 07, 08, 42, 22 PATHO CINEMA 42 PAUSA 44 PHILCO 32, 42 PHILIPS 31, 07, 34, 56, 68 PHOENIX 32 PHONOLA 07 PROFEX 42, 44 PROTECH 07, 42, 44, 46, 49 QUE LL E 31, 32, 07, 42, 45, 53 R - LINE 07 RADIOLA 07 RADIOSHACK 10, 23, 21, 02 RBM 53 RCA 01, 10, 15, 16 , 17, 18, 61 , 62, 09 REDIFFUSION 32, 42 REX 31, 46 ROADSTAR 41, 44, 46 SABA 31, 36, 42, 51 SAISHO 39, 44, 46 SALORA 31, 32, 42, 43 SAMBERS 49 SAMSUNG 07, 38, 44, 46, 69, 70 SANYO 35, 45, 48, 21, 14 , 91 SBR 07, 34 SCHAUB LORENZ 42 SCHNEIDER 07, 41, 47 SEG 42, 46 SEI 32, 40, 49 SELECO 31, 42 SHARP 02, 19, 27, 67, 90 SIAREM 32, 49 SIEMENS 31 SINUDYNE 32, 39, 40, 49 SKANTIC 43 SOLAVOX 31 SONOKO 07, 44 SONOLOR 31, 35 SONTEC 07 SONY 04 SOUNDWAVE 07 STANDARD 41, 44 STERN 31 SUSUMU 41 SYSLINE 07 TANDY 31, 41, 48 TASHIKO 34 TATUNG 07, 48 TEC 42 TELEAVIA 36 TELEFUNKEN 36, 37, 52 TELETECH 44 TENSAI 40, 41 THOMSON 36, 51, 52, 63 THORN 31, 07, 42, 45, 48 TOMASHI 18 TOSHIBA 05, 02, 26, 21, 53 TOWADA 42 ULTRAVOX 32 , 42, 49 UNIDE N 92 UNIVERSUM 31, 07, 38, 42, 45, 46, 54 VESTEL 07 VICTOR 13 VOXSON 31 WALTHAM 43 WATSON 07 WATT RADIO 32, 42, 49 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 07 YOKO 07, 42, 46 ZENITH 03, 20 V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 25 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
04 26 En Using the TOOLS menu Va r ious functions can be called out acco r ding to the p layer ’s op er ating status. 1 Displ ay the TOOLS menu. P r ess TOOLS. 2 Select and set the item. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . Note • Items th at cannot be changed a r e dis p layed in gr ay. The items that can b e selected de p en d on the p laye r ’s status.  To change the setting of the selected item Use  / to ch ange.  To close the TOOLS menu P r ess TOOLS o r RETURN.  TOOLS menu item list Switching the video output terminal to be viewed Use the pr ocedu r e below to switch the video out p ut signal to be viewed between the HDMI OUT te r minal and an analog out p ut te r minal ( COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO out p ut te r minals). Caution •T h e p ictur e m ay not be disp layed for a while when the video out p ut te r minal is switched. • When the HDMI OUT te r m inal is selected , no video signals a r e ou t p ut f r om the othe r video out p ut te r minals. • When a video out p ut te r minal othe r th an the HDMI OUT te r minal is selected, no audio and video signals a r e out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal.  Press VIDEO SELECT. •T h e c u rr ent video out p ut ter minal is disp layed on the TV sc r een and on the p la yer ’s f r ont p anel dis p lay. To switch the video out p ut te r minals, pr ess VIDEO SELECT agai n o r pr ess  / . •T h e v i d e o o u t p ut ter mina l setting can also be sw itched by pr essing  /  on the p layer ’s fr ont p anel. Item Description Play f r om Be ginning Play the selected title, t r ack o r fil e f r om the sta r t. Slideshow Play a slideshow of th e image files on the selected disc o r folde r . Play Mode Dis p lay the Play Mode sc r een ( p age 33). Video Adjust Dis p lay the p ictur e quality adjustment sc r een ( p age 39). Seconda r y Video Switch the BD-ROM’s seconda r y vide o (Pictu r e-in-Pictu r e) ( p age 31). Subtitle Switch the subtitles ( p age 30). Angle Switch the BD-ROM/DV D-Video disc’s came r a angles ( p age 30). Rotate Rotate the im age while p laying a slideshow ( p age 37). Audio Adjust Dis p lay the aud io adjust ment men u ( p age 40). Audio Switch the audio ( p ag e 31). Seconda r y Audio Switch the BD-ROM’s seconda r y audio ( p age 31). TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER Angle Audio Subtitle Audio Adjust Video Adjust BD PLAYER TOOLS Now Playing Dis p lay the p layback sc reen of the cu rr ently p laying t rack o r file. O r iginal/Play List Switch the DVD-R/-RW’s (VR fo r mat) list sc r een betwee n the o r iginal list and the p laylist. Add to HMG Playlist Add the selected t r ack o r file to the HMG Playlist ( p age 3 7). Delete f r om HMG Playlist Delete the sele cted t r ack o r file f r om the HMG Playlist ( p age 3 8). Out p ut Video Resolution Switch the ou t p ut vide o r esolution f r om the va r ious out p ut te r minals ( p age 27). Delete all p laylists Clear s all the titles/cha p ter s fr om the p laylist. Item Description VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY O UTPUT RESOLUTION HDMI (Source Direct)   Video Output T erminal Out p ut video r esolution setting of selected vi deo out p ut t e r minal Example: V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 26 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
27 En 04 Switching the output video resolution Use the pr ocedu r e below to switch the out p ut video r esolution fr om th e var ious video out p ut ter minals. Caution • On some devices (TV, AV r eceiver or am p lifier , etc.), the video o r audio may not be out p ut pr op er ly when the r esolution is switc hed. If this ha pp ens, u se OUTPUT RESOLUTION to set a r esolution at which the video and audio a r e pr op er ly out p ut. •W h e n v i d e o s i g n a l s a r e being outp ut with a r eso lution of 1080/60i, 1080/60 p , 720/60 p , 1080/24 p , 1080/50i, 1080/50 p o r 720/5 0 p f r om the HDMI OUT te r min al o r COMPONENT VIDEO out p ut te r minals, the p ict ur e may be out p u t with an as p ect r atio of 16:9, even if the TV Aspect Rati o is set to 4:3 (Standard) . •T h e p ictur e ma y not be disp layed for a while when the r esolution is switched.  Press OUTPUT RESOLUTION. •T h e c u rr ent ou t p ut video r esolution setting is dis p layed on the TV sc r een and on the p la ye r ’s f r ont p anel disp lay. To switch the out p ut video r esolution, pr ess OUTPUT RESOLUTION again o r pr ess  / . •T h e o u t p ut video r esolution dep ends on th e video out p ut te r mi nal ( p age 28). •T h e o u t p ut video r esolution setting can also be switched by selecting Output Video Resol ution f r om the TOOLS menu.  About the frame/field frequency and NTSC/PAL TV systems By facto r y default setting, the f r ame/field f requency is set fo r an out p ut of 60 Hz, and the TV system fo r mat fo r the video signal out p ut f r om the VIDEO ou t p ut te r minals de p ends on the NTSC on PAL TV setting. When sou r ces with a f r ame/field f requency of 50 Hz a r e p layed, the out p ut f r ame/field f r equency automatically switches to 50 Hz, and the video signa l out p ut f r om the VIDEO out p ut te r minals is set to be out p ut in the PAL TV syste m fo r mat. When p layback is sto pp ed, the fr ame/field fr equency and TV system settings r emain at the settings last used. The f r ame/field f r equency and TV system settings do no t change even when the p ower is t u r ned off. They only switch when a video mate r ial with a d iffe r ent f r ame/field f r equency is p layed. If the p ic tu r e is not dis p layed on the TV when a sou r ce with a diffe r ent f r ame/field f r equency is p la yed, use the pr ocedu r e below to switch the fr ame/field fr equency and TV system settings fo r the signal out p ut f r om the p layer . Eject the disc, then pr ess the  OPEN/CLOSE button on the f r ont p anel while pr essing the  button to switch to a diffe r ent f r ame/field f r equency. The f r ame/field f r equency switches between 50 Hz and 60 Hz each time this o pe r ation is p e r fo r med. The indicato r fo r the f r ame f r equency’s cu rr ent setting lights on th e f r ont p anel dis p lay ( p age 13).  About Film material The film mate r ial is a video signal with a f r ame r ate of 24 f r ames/second. Fo r exam p le, these ma te r ials inc lude 1080/24 p , 720/24 p , etc.  To out put film material To out p ut 1080/24 p film m ate r ial f r om HDMI OUT te r minal, set the out p ut video r esolutio n to eithe r Auto o r Source Direc t . Caution • 1080/24 p signals can only be out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal. They cannot be outp ut fr om other video te r minals. • When Auto is selected , the p ictu r e is out p ut at 60 f r ames/second if you r TV is not com p atible with 1080/ 24 p signals. • When Source Direct is selected, the signals a r e out p ut as such, even if you r TV is not com p atibl e with 1080/24 p signals. If the p ictu r e is n ot dis p layed pr o pe r ly, use OUTPUT RESOLUTION to set an out p ut video r esolution at which the video and audio signals a r e pro pe r ly o ut p ut. • Even if Auto o r Source Direct is selected, 7 20/24 p video signals a r e out p ut at 60 fr ames/second. CLEAR ENTER VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION Auto   Output Video R esolution Source : 1080/60i Current Output : 1080/60i Video r esolution of the cu rr ently p laying disc Out p ut video r esolution f r om the p laye r Example: V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 27 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
04 28 En  About the output video resolution The out p ut video r esolution setting and the r esolution of the p ictur e th at is actually out p ut diffe r fo r the diffe r ent te r minals. See the table below.Th e table below shows the out p ut video r esolution fo r the diffe r ent te r minals when the f r ame/field f r equency of the p layback sou r ce is 50 Hz on the u pp e r line, the r esolutions when the sou r ce’s f r ame/field f r equency is 60 Hz and 24 Hz on the lowe r line. Output video resolution setting HDMI 1 1. The v ideo out p ut te r minal set at Video in the Setup Navigator ( p age 23) o r the video out put te r minal selected with VIDEO SELECT ( p age 26). COMPONENT VIDEO/VIDEO 1 HDMI OUT te rminal COMPONENT VIDEO/VIDEO output termi nals HDMI OUT terminal COMPONENT VIDEO output terminals 2 2. De p ending on the BD, the p ictu r es may not be out p ut. VIDEO output terminal 2 (TV system) Auto 3 3. T his cannot be selected when the video out p ut te r minal is set to COMPONENT VIDEO / VI DEO . Resolution pr ef e rred by TV 4,5,6 4. The p ictu r es a r e out p ut with the pr efe rr ed out p ut r esolution of the device (TV, AV r eceiver or amp lifier , etc.) conn ected to HDMI OUT te r minal. 5. Fo r details on the out p ut of film mate r ial (1 080/24 p o r 7 20/24 p video signals), see To output film material on p age 27. 6. Sou r ces with a r esolution of 72 0/60 p , 720/50 p and 720/24 p a r e out p ut at 1080/60i o r 1080/50i eve n if the TV’s r ecommended r esolution is 1080/60 p o r 1080/50 p . No video signals a r e out p ut No video signals a r e out p ut —— — 576i o r 480i 576/50i 576/50i 576/50i PAL 480/60i 480/6 0i 480/60i  7 7. De p ends on the NTSC on PAL TV setting ( p age 43). 576 p o r 480 p 576/50 p 576/50 p 576/50i PAL 480/60 p 480/60 p 480/60i  7 1080i 1080/50i 576/50 p 576/50i PAL 1080/60i 1080/60i 8,9 8. DVD-Video o r DVD-R/-RW (VR fo r mat) may be out p ut at 480/60 p . 9. BD-ROM o r BD-R/-RE may be out p ut at 480/60 p . 480/60i  7 1080 p 3 1080/50 p 10,11 10. D e p ending on the c onnect ed HDMI ca ble, the video signals may not be out p ut. 11. Sou r ces with a r esolution of 720/60 p , 720/50 p and 72 0/24 p a r e out p ut at 1080/60i o r 1080/50i. —— — 1080/60 p 10,11 Sou r ce Di r ect Resolution r eco rded on disc 5,12,13 12. D e p ending on the connected TV, the video signals may not be out p ut. 13. 720/24 p film mate r ial is out p ut at 720/60 p . Resolution r eco r ded on disc 9,12,13,14 14. 1080/24 p film mate r ial is out p ut at 1080/60i. 576/50i PAL 480/60i  7 V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 28 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
29 En 05 Chapter 5 Playback Playing discs or files This section desc r ibes the p layer ’s main o p er ations. Fo r the ty p es of discs that can be p layed, see Playable discs on p age 8 . Fo r the ty p es of files that can be p layed, see Playable files on p age 10. Image and audio files r ecor ded o n discs ar e p layed with the Home Media Galle r y ( p age 36). 1 Press  STANDBY/ON to tu rn on the power. Tu r n the TV’s p owe r on and swit ch its in p ut befo r ehand. 2 Press  OPEN/CLOSE to open the di sc tray and load the disc. Note • Load the disc with the pr inted side facing u p. • Seve r al dozen se conds a re r equi r ed to r ead the disc. Once r ea ding is com p leted, the ty p e of disc is dis p layed on the p la ye r ’s f r ont p anel disp la y. 3 P ress  PLAY to play the disc.  on the p layer ’s fr ont p anel disp lay li ghts dur ing p layback. •T o p ause, pr ess  PAUSE dur in g p layback.  on the p layer ’s fr ont p anel disp lay lights when p layback is p aused. •T o s t o p , pr ess  STOP dur ing p layback. Note • Some discs sta r t p laying auto matically when the disc t r ay is closed. • DVD-Video discs have p ar enta l lock featu r es. In p ut the p asswo r d r egiste r ed in the p laye r ’s s ettings to unlock the p ar ental lock . For details, see p age 50. •F o r some BD-R /-RE, p la yback pr otection is set fo r the disc o r titles. In p ut the code num be r set fo r the disc to unlock the pr otecti on. •C h e c k Troubleshooting on p age 67 if video or audio signals a r e not be ing out p ut pr o pe r ly.  If the disc menu is displ ayed Fo r some discs, the disc menu is dis p layed automatically when p layback s tar ts. The con tents of th e disc men u and the way to o p er ate diff e r fr om disc to disc.  Resuming playback from where it was stopped (resume playback function) • When  STOP is pr essed du r ing p layback, the p oin t at which the disc sto pp ed is sto r ed in the memo r y. When  PLAY is pr essed, p layback r esumes f r om that p oint. •F o r audio CDs and audio files, p layback star ts fr om the beginning of the t r ack/file that was p laying. •I f t h e s t o p m ode was set while p laying a slideshow of image files, p layback sta r ts f r om the image file last dis p layed. • To cancel the r esume p la yback function, pr ess  STOP while p layback is sto pp ed. Note •T h e r esume p layback function is canceled automaticall y in the foll owing cases : –W h e n t h e d i s c t r ay is op ened. – When the file list window is switched. –W h e n t h e p ower is tu r ned off. (Fo r BDs and DVDs this does not cancel the r esu me p layback fun ction.) •T h e r esume p l ayback function can not be used for some discs. TV CONTROL STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER ENTER VIDEO SELECT SECONDARY PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE INPUT SELECT CH VOL AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT RESOLUTION ENTER CLEAR V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 29 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
05 30 En Forward and reverse scanning  During playback, press  or  . • The scanning s p eed switches each time the button is pr essed. The s p eed step s dep end on the disc or file (the s p eed is dis p layed on the TV sc r een). •F o r war d or r ever se scanning is also p ossible by holding the button down. No r mal p layback r esumes when the bu tton is r eleased.  To resume normal playback  Pr ess  PLAY. Playing specific titles, chapters or tracks  Input the number of the ti tle, chapter or track you want to play. • Use the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to in p ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER . •P r ess CLEAR to clear the values you have inp ut. Skipping content  Pr ess  PREV or  NEXT. •W h e n  NEXT is pr essed, the p layback skip s ahead to the beginning of the next title/cha p ter /tr ack/ file. •W h e n  PR EV is pr essed, the p layback skip s back to the beginning of the c u rr ently p laying title/cha p te r / t r ack/file . P r ess twice to ski p back to the beginning of the pr eviou s title/cha p te r /t r ack/file. Playing in slow motion  While playback is paused, press a nd hold  / or /  . •T h e s p eed switches each time the button is pr essed (the s p eed is dis p layed on the TV sc r een). The s p eed ste p s de p end on the disc o r file.  To resume normal playback  Pr ess  PLAY. Step forward and step reverse  While playback is pau sed, press  / o r /  . •T h e p ictur e moves a step for war d or r ever se each time the button is pr essed.  To resume normal playback  Pr ess  PLAY. Switching the camera angles Fo r BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs on which multi p le angles a r e r ecor ded, the angles can be switched du r ing p layback.  During playback, press ANGLE. •T h e c u rr en t angle and total numbe r of r ecor ded angles a r e dis p layed on the TV sc r een and o n the p layer ’s fr ont p anel disp lay. To switch the an gles, pr ess ANGLE again o r pr ess  /  . • The angles can also be switched by selectin g Angle f r om the TOOLS menu. •I f t h e a n g l e s a r e not switched when ANGLE is pr essed, switch them f r om the menu scr een. Switching the subtitles Fo r discs on which multi p le subtitl es a re r eco r ded, the subtitles can be switched du r ing p layback. Caution • The subtitles cannot be switched fo r discs r ecor ded on a DVD o r BD r ecor der . Also r efer to the o p er atin g inst r uction s of the device used fo r r eco r ding.  During playback, press SUBTITLE . •T h e c u rr en t subtitle and total numbe r of r ecor ded subtitles a r e d is p layed on the TV sc r een and o n the p layer ’s fr ont p anel disp lay. To switch t he subtitle , pr ess SUBTITLE again o r pr ess  / . • The subtitles can also be switched by selecting Subtitle f r om the TOOLS men u. • If the subtitles a r e not switched when SUBTITLE is pr es sed, switch them f r om the menu sc r een.  Turning the subtitles off  Press SUBTITLE, then press CLEAR. 1 /4   Angle Example: Cu rr ent angle/Total numbe r of r ecor ded angles 1/2 English Subtitle   Example: Cu rr ent subtit le/Total numbe r of r ecor ded subtitles V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 30 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
31 En 05 Switching the audio and secondary audio Fo r discs o r files on which mu lti p le audio st r eams/ channels a r e r ecor ded, audio st r eams/chan nels can be switched du r ing p layb ack. Als o use thi s pr ocedu r e to switch the seconda r y audio fo r BD-ROMs on which seconda r y audio is r eco r ded.  During playback, press AUDIO. •T h e c u rr ent audio and total numbe r of r ecor ded audio st r eams a r e dis p layed on the TV sc r een an d on the p layer ’s fr ont p anel disp lay. To switch the audio, pr ess AUDIO again o r pr ess  /  . • To switch the seconda r y audio, pr ess SECONDAR Y AUDIO . •T h e a u d i o / s e c o n d a r y audio can also be switched by selecting Audio o r Second ary Audio f r om the TO OLS menu . •I f t h e a u d i o / s e c o n d a r y audio is not switched when AUDIO / SECONDARY AUDIO is pr essed, switch it f r om the menu sc r een.  Turning the Secondary Audio off  Press SECONDARY AUDIO, then press CLEAR. Switching the secondary video Use the pr ocedu r e below to switch the seconda r y video (Pictu r e-in-P ictu r e) r eco r ded on t he BD-ROM.  Dur ing playback, pr ess SECONDARY VIDEO. •T h e c u rr ent seconda r y video and total number of r ecor ded secondar y video str eams ar e disp lay ed on the TV sc r een and on the p layer ’s f r ont p anel dis p lay. To switch the seconda ry video, pr ess SECONDARY VIDEO again o r pr ess  /  . •T h e s e c o n d a r y video can also be switched by selecting Secon dary Video f r om the TOOLS menu. •I f t h e s e c o n d a r y video is not switched when SECONDARY VIDEO is pr essed, switch it f r om th e menu sc r een.  Turning the Secondary Video off  Press SECONDARY VIDEO, then press CLEAR. Displaying the disc information  Press DISPLAY. The disc info r mation a pp ea r s on the TV sc r een. The info r mation switches each time the button is pr essed. The info r mation dis p lay d iffe r s du r ing p layback and when p layback is sto pp ed. 2/2 Engli sh Dol by True HD 9 6kHz 7. 1ch L C R L s R s L b R b LFE Audio   Cu rr ent audio/Total numbe r of r ecor ded audio str eams Example: Audio ty p e Numbe r of channels Channels r eco r ded on disc 1 /4 Seconda r y Video   Example: Cu rr ent second a r y video/Total numbe r of r ecor ded secondar y video str eams V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 31 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
05 32 En Playback functions The functions that can be used diffe r accor ding to the ty p e of disc and file. In some cases, some of the functions cannot be used. Check the usable functions on the table below. Function 1 1. Some functions may not wo r k fo r some discs o r files, even if indicated [  ] on the table. Disc/file type BD- ROM BD-R /-RE DVD- Video DVD-R /-RW (VR format) AVCHD Image file Audio file Audio CD Fo r wa r d and reve r se scanning 2 2. Fo r some discs, no r mal p layback r esumes automatically when the cha p te r switches.  3 3. No sound is pr oduced du r ing fo r war d and r ever se scanning.  3  3  3  3   4 4. S ound is pr oduced du r ing fo r war d and r ever se sc anning.  4 Playing s p ecific titles, cha p te r s or tr acks     Ski pp ing content  Playing in slow motion 2,5 5. • No sound is out p ut du r ing slow motion p layback . • It is not p ossible to switch the s p eed du r ing r eve r se slow motion p layback.     Ste p fo r wa r d and ste p r eve r se 2     Switching the came r a angles 6 6. Angle ma r k is dis p layed fo r scenes at which multi p le angles a r e r ecor ded if Angle/Secondary Indicator is set to On ( p age 45).     Switching the subti tles 7 7. • The ty p es of r ecor ded subtit les de p end on the disc an d file. • In some cases the subtitle may switch o r the switching sc r een pr ovided on the disc may be dis p layed immediately, w ithout the cu rr ent subtitle o r the total numbe r of subtitles r ecor ded on the disc being dis p layed.     Switching the aud io 8 8. The ty p es of r ecor ded audio st r eams de p end on the disc and file.     Switching the secon da r y audio 9 9. • The ty p es of r ecor ded sec onda r y a udio st r eams de p end on the disc and file. • In some cases the seconda r y audio may switch o r the s witching sc r een pr ovided on the disc may be dis p layed immediately, without the cu rr ent seconda r y audio o r the total numbe r of seconda r y au dio st r eams r ecor ded on the disc being dis p layed. • Seconda r y audio ma r k is dis p lay ed fo r scenes at which second a r y audio is r ecor ded if Angle/Secondary Indicator is set to On ( p age 45).  10 10. Some discs do not include seconda r y audio.  Switching the secon da r y video 11 11. • In some cases the seconda r y video may switch or the switching sc r een pr ovided on the disc may be dis p layed immediately, without the cu rr ent seconda r y video o r the total number of secondar y video str eams r ecor ded on the disc being dis p layed. • Seconda r y video ma r k is dis p layed fo r scenes at which seconda r y video is r ecor ded if Angle/Secondary Indicator is set to On ( p age 45).  12 12. Some discs do not include seconda r y video.  Dis p laying the disc info r mation    V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 32 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
33 En 05 Using the Play Mode functions Playing from a specific time (Time Search) 1 Duri ng playback, press PLAY MODE to display th e Play Mode screen. The Play Mode sc r een can also be dis p layed by selecting Play Mode f r om the TOOLS menu. 2 Sele ct Time Search. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Input the ti me. Use the numbe r button s (0 to 9) o r /  to inp ut the time. Use  / to move th e cu r so r . •T o p lay fr om 45 minutes, inp ut 0 , 0 , 4 , 5 , 0 and 0 , then pr ess ENTER . •T o p lay fr om 1 hour 20 minutes, inp ut 0 , 1 , 2 , 0 , 0 and 0 , then pr ess ENTER . •P r ess CLEAR to clear the values you have inp ut. 4 Sta rting playback from the specifi ed time. Use  / to se lect Search , then pr ess ENTER .  Closing the Play Mode screen P r ess PLAY MODE o r HOME MENU. Playing a specific title, chapter or track (Search) 1 Press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode screen. The Play Mode sc r een can also be dis p layed by select ing Play Mode f r om the TOOLS menu. 2 Selec t the type of search. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . See the table on p age 35 fo r the sea r ch ty p es. 3 Inp ut the number. Use the numbe r butt ons (0 to 9) o r /  to inp ut the numbe r . Use  / to mo ve the cu r so r . •T o s e a r ch for title 32, inp ut 0 , 3 and 2 , then pr ess ENTER . •P r ess CLEAR to clear the values you have inp ut. 4 Starting playback from the specified title, chapter or track. Use  / to sele ct Search , then pr ess ENTER . Playing a specific section within a title or track repeatedly (A-B Repeat) Use this pr ocedu r e to p lay a s p ecific section within a title o r t r ack re p eatedly. 1 During pl ayback, press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode scre en. The Play Mode sc r een can also be dis p layed by select ing Play Mode f r om the TOOLS menu. 2 Selec t A-B Repeat. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select the s tarting point for A-B Repeat. Use  / to sele ct A (Start) , then pr ess ENTER . 4 Selec t the end point for A-B Re peat. Use  / to sele ct B (End) , then pr ess ENTER . A-B Re p eat p layback sta r ts.  To cancel A-B Repeat play •S e l e c t Off f r om the Re p eat/Random sc r een, then pr ess ENTER . •D u r ing p lay back, pr ess  STOP or CLEAR. VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT Time Search 1 2:45:00 Search Title Search 0 32 Title Search A-B Repeat A (Start) B (End) Off V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 33 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
05 34 En Note •A - B R e p eat p lay is canceled in the following cases: – When the angle is switche d (fo r BD-ROM a nd DVD- Video discs only). – When you sea r ch ou tside the r ep eat r ange. – When you sta r t othe r Re p eat Play o r Random Play. Playing repeatedly (Repeat Play) Use this pr ocedu r e to p lay the cu rr ently p laying disc, title, cha p te r , t r ack o r file r ep eatedly. 1 Duri ng playback, press PLAY MODE to display th e Play Mode screen. The Play Mode sc r een can also be dis p layed by selecting Play Mode f r om the TOOLS menu. 2 Select Repeat/Random. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Sele ct the type of Repeat Play. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . See the table on p age 35 fo r the t y p es of Re p eat Play.  To cancel Repeat Play • Select Off f r om the Re p eat/ Random s c r een, then pr ess ENTER . •D u r ing p layback, pr ess  STOP or CLEAR. Note •T h e t y p e of r ep eat modes dep ends on the disc and file being p laye d. See the table on p age 35. •R e p eat Play is canceled in the fo llowing cases: – When the angle is switche d (fo r BD-ROM a nd DVD- Video discs only). – When you sea r ch ou tside the r ep eat r ange. – When you sta r t othe r Re p eat Play o r Random Play. Playing in random order (Random Play) Use this pr ocedu r e to p lay the t r acks o r files in r andom o r de r. 1 Duri ng playback, press PLAY MODE to display th e Play Mode screen. The Play Mode sc r een can also be dis p layed by selecting Play Mode f r om the TOOLS menu. 2 Select Repeat/Random. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Selec t the Random Play. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER .  To cancel Random Play • Select Off f r om the Re p eat/ Random s c r een, then pr ess ENTER . •D u r ing p lay back, pr ess  STOP or CLEAR. Note • Random Play is canceled in the following c ases: – When you use the sea r ch fun ction. – When you sta r t Re p eat Play. V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 34 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
35 En 05 About Play Mode t ypes The functions that can be used diffe r accor ding to the ty p e of disc and file. In some cases, some of the functions cannot be used. Check the usable functions on the table below. Play Mode t ype Mark 1 1. The ty p e of Play Mode is indicated by t he ma r k. Disc/file type BD- ROM 2 2. Fo r BD-ROM and DVD-Video discs, some of the functions cannot be u sed with some titles. BD-R /-RE DVD- Video 2 DVD-R /-RW (VR format) AVCHD Image file Audio file Audio CD Re p eat Play Playing a s p ecific section within a titl e o r t r ack re p eatedly (A-B R e p eat)     Playing a title r ep eate dly (Title Re p ea t)     Playing a cha p ter r ep eatedly (C ha p ter Re p eat)     Playing a t r ack o r fi le r ep eatedly (T r ack Re p eat)    Playing all the tit les, t r acks o r files on the disc r ep eatedly (All Re p eat)   3 3. The o r iginal titles a r e p layed r ep eatedly. Howeve r , the p laylist titles cannot be p layed r ep eatedly.   4 4. T he files in the folde r ar e p layed r ep eatedly.  5 5. T he files in the folde r or HMG Playlist a r e p layed r ep eatedly.  6 6. The t r acks in the disc o r HMG Playlist a r e p layed r ep eatedly. Random Play Playing the t r acks o r files in r andom o r de r (Random T r ack/File)     Sea r ch Playing f r om a s p ecific time (Time Sea r ch) —     Playing a s p ecif ic title (Title Sea r ch) —     Playing a s p ecif ic cha p ter (Cha p te r Sea r ch) —     Playing a s p ecif ic t r ack (T r ack Sea r ch) —   V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 35 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
05 36 En Playing from the Home Media Gallery The Home Media Galle r y lets you dis p lay a list of the ti tles, t r acks o r files r eco r ded on the di sc. The discs that can be p layed fr om the Home Media Gal le r y a r e as shown below (see also p age 8). •B D - R / - R E d i s c s • DVD-R/-RW (VR fo r mat) discs • Audio CDs (CD-DAs and DTS-CDs) • DVDs/CDs on whi ch only data files of ima ge o r audio files, etc. a r e r eco r ded Playing discs 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home M edia Gall ery. The Home Media Galle r y can also be dis p la yed by selecting Home Media Gallery f r om the Home Menu then pr essing ENTER . 2 Select the disc. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select th e title or track to be played. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . Playback sta r ts.  Closing the Home Media Gallery P r ess HOME MEDIA GALLERY o r HOME MENU. Note • When p laying an audio C D (CD-DA o r DTS-CD), t he Now Playing sc r een is dis p layed. • Some BD-R/-RE discs have p layback pr otection. To cancel the pr otection, in p ut th e p asswor d set fo r the disc. •T o p lay DVD-R/-RW (VR for mat) p laylists, switch to the p laylist using t he Original/Play List command on the TOOLS menu ( p age 26). Playing image files 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. The Home Media Ga lle r y can also be dis p layed by selecti ng Home Media Gallery f r om the Home Menu then pr essing ENTER . 2 Select the di sc. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Selec t Photos. Use  / to select Photos , then pr ess ENTER . 4 Selec t Folders or All Photos. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . • Folders – The files in the selected folde r a r e dis p layed. • All Photos – All the r eco r ded files a r e dis p layed. If you have selected All Photos , pr oceed to ste p 6. 5 Select the folder containi ng the file you want to play. Use  / / /  to select, then pr ess ENTER . A list of the files and folde r s in the selected folde r is dis p layed. 6 Selec t and set the file you want to play. Use  / / /  to se lect, then pr ess ENTER . A slideshow sta r ts f r om the selected file, and continues until the end of the list is r each ed.  About Slideshow A dis p lay of the files on the disc o r in the folde r that switches automati cally. Use  / to dis p lay th e pr evious o r next file. HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER TV CONTROL AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE FL DIMMER INPUT SELECT CH VOL PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT BD-R BDAV My F avorite TV Program 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 items Morning serial drama News at noon Evening movie Midnight variety show Playback protection W orld heritage Drama: Blank time Music and us My Folder DVD-RW/Photos/Folders 99 items V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 36 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
37 En 05  Rotating images  Pr ess ANGLE while playing a slidesh ow. • The image rotates each ti me the button is pressed (90°  180°  270°  0°  ... ). The image can also be r otated by selecting Rotate f r om the TOOLS menu. Playing audio files 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home M edia Gall ery. The Home Media Galle r y can also be dis p la yed by selecting Home Media Gallery f r om the Home Menu then pr essing ENTER . 2 Select the disc. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select Music. Use  / to select Music , then pr ess ENTER . 4 Select Folders or All So ngs. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . • Folders – The files in the selected folde r a r e dis p layed. • All Songs – All the r eco r ded files a r e dis p layed. If you have selected All Songs , pr oceed to ste p 6. 5 Selec t the folder containi ng the file you want to play. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . A list o f the files and folde r s in the selected folde r is dis p layed. 6 Select and set the file you want to play. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTE R . Pla yback sta r ts f r om the selected file, and cont inues until the end of the list is r eached. Use  / to p lay the pr evious o r next file. The Now Playing sc r een (shown below) is dis p layed. Playing in the desired order (HMG Playlist) The discs that can add t r acks and files to the HMG (Home Media Ga lle r y) Playlist a r e as shown below. • Audio CDs (CD-DAs and DTS-CDs) • DVDs/CDs on which audio files a r e r ecor ded  Adding tracks/files Use this pr ocedu r e to add t r acks and files, and c r eate the HMG Playlist. 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home Media Gallery. The Home Media Ga lle r y can also be dis p layed by selecti ng Home Media Gallery f r om the Home Menu pr essing ENTER . 2 Select the di sc. Load the disc befo r ehand. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select the track/f ile to be added. Use  / to select. 4 Press TOOLS to d isplay the TOOLS menu . 5 Select Add to HMG Playlist. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . The t r ac k o r file selected in ste p 3 is added to the HMG Playlist. To add mo r e t r acks o r files, r ep eat ste p s 3 to 5.  To add the currently playing track/ file to the HMG Playlist 1 While the track/file is play ing, press TO OLS to display the TOOLS menu. 2U s e  / to select Add to HMG Pla ylist, then press ENTER. Note • A maximum of 24 t r acks/files can be added to the HMG Playlist. •T h e H M G P l a y l i s t i s c l e a r ed in the following cases: –W h e n t h e p ower is tu r ned off. –W h e n t h e d i s c t r ay is op ened. Music 001.mp3 DATA DISC 0.05.34 0.02.33 Play Cu rr ently p laying file Total file p laying time Ela p sed time Folders CD-ROM/Music 15Items Music001.mp3 Music002.mp3 Music003.mp3 Music004.mp3 Music005.mp3 Music006.mp3 Music007.mp3 Music008.mp3 Play from Beginning Add to HMG Playlist Now Playing BD PLAYER TOOLS V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 37 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
05 38 En  Playing the HMG Playlist 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY to display the Home M edia Gall ery. The Home Media Galle r y can also be dis p la yed by selecting Home Media Gallery f r om the Home Menu pr essing ENT ER . 2 Select HMG Playlist. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select the track/file to be played. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . Playback sta r ts f r om the selected t r ack/file, and continues un til the end of the list is r ea ched. Use  /  to p lay th e pr evious or ne xt t r ack/file. The No w Playing sc r een (shown below) is di s p layed.  Deleting tracks/files from the HMG Playlist 1 Select the track/file to be deleted, then pre ss TOOLS to display the TOOLS menu. 2U s e  / to select Delete fro m HMG Playlist, then press ENTER. Music 001.mp3 DATA DISC 0.05.34 0.02.33 Play HMG Cu rr ently p laying t r ack/file Total t r ack/file p laying time Ela p sed time V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 38 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
39 En 06 Chapter 6 Adjusting audio and video Adjusting the video The quality of the p layback p ictu r e can be adjusted acco r ding to the TV you a r e using. 1 During playback, press VID EO ADJUST to display the Video Adju st screen. The Video Adjust sc r een can also be dis p layed by selecting Video Adjust f r om the TOOLS men u. 2 Select a preset. Select using  / acco r ding to the T V being used. • Pioneer PDP – Select this when connected to a Pionee r p lasma T V. • Pioneer LCD – Select this when connected to a Pionee r liquid c r ystal dis p lay TV. • Pioneer Projec tor – Select this when connected to a Pionee r f r ont pr ojecto r . • PDP – Select this when connected to a p las ma TV of anothe r b r and. • LCD – Sele ct this when connected to a liquid c r ystal dis p lay of anothe r b r and. • Projector – Select this when connected to a f r ont pr ojecto r of another br and. • Professional – With this setting, video signal pr ocessi ng is r estr ai ned. Select this wh en connected to a pr ofessional m onito r . • Memory1 to 3 – Pictu r e quality settings with adjusted p ar amete r s can be sto r ed in th e memo r y. Fo r a desc r ip tion of the p ar amete r s, see When Memory1, 2 o r 3 is sel ected below.  When Memory1, 2 or 3 is selected 1 Select Adjustments. Use  to select Adjustments , th en pr ess ENTER . A detailed settings sc r een a pp ea r s. 2 Selec t the item to be adjusted. Use  / to select. 3 Adjust the picture quality . When  / a r e pr essed, the adjustmen ts can be made viewing the p ictur e. The deta iled sett ings sc r een r ea pp ear s when ENTER is pr essed. • Prog.Mot ion – Adjust acco r ding to the ty p e of image (moving o r still image). T his is effect ive mainly w hen out p utting video mate r ials as pr og r essive images. • Pure Cinema – This setting o p timizes t he o pe r ation of the pr og r essive scanning ci r cuit fo r p laying film mate r ials. No r mall y set it to Auto1 . If the p ictur e seems unnatu r a l, switch this to Auto 2 , On o r Off ( p age 40). • YNR – Reduces noise in the lumin ance (Y) signal. • CNR – Reduc es noise in the c h r oma (C) signal. • BNR – Reduces the block noise (block-sha p ed disto r tion gene r ated u p on MPEG com pr ession). • MNR – Reduces the mosquito noise (disto r tion along the contou r s of the p ictur e gene r ated u p on MPEG com pr ession). • Detail – Adjusts the p ictu r e’s c ontou r s. • White Level – Adjusts the level of the white po r tions. • Black Level – Adjusts the level of the black po r tions. • Black Setup – Select the black level as the setu p level. No r mally select 7.5 IRE . If th e black level is too b r ight due to the combin ation with the co nnected TV, select 0 IRE . • Gamma Correction – Adjusts how the da r k po r tions of the p ic tu r e look . • Hue – Adjusts the balance between g r een and r ed. • Chroma Level – Adjusts the density of the colo r s. Note • Prog.Mot ion and Pure Cinema have the effect only fo r p ictu r es r eco r ded in the inte r laced scan fo r mat (480i o r 1080i signals). TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE VIDEO ADJUST ENTER Adjustments Video Adjust PDP Prog. Motion Pure Cinema YNR CNR BNR MNR Detail White Level Video Adjust [ Memory1 ] Motion Still Auto1 Off Max Off Max Off Max Off Max Soft Fine Min Max Motion Still Prog. Motion V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 39 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
06 40 En • Prog.Moti on is disabled when Pure Cinema is se t to On . • Black Setup has the effect only fo r p ictu r es out p ut f r om the VIDEO ou t p ut te r minals and signals out p ut with a f r ame/field f r equency of 60Hz. • YNR , CNR , BNR and MNR have no effect on 1080/24 p video signals out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal.  Closing the Video Adjust screen P r ess HOME MENU.  About Pure Cinema The r e a r e two ty p es of video signals: • Video materia l – Video signals r eco r ded at 25 o r 30 f r ames/second • Film material – Video signals r eco r ded at 24 f r ames/ second “Pu r e Cinema” uses signal pr ocessing suited fo r “film mate r ial” when conve r ting 480i/576io r 1 080i inte r laced video signals into pr og r essive video signals, r esulting in clea r p ictu r e r e pr oducti on without losin g the quality of the mate r ial. is dis p layed on the disc info r mation sc r een whe n p laying the “film m ater ial” p ictur es of BD-ROM, BD-R/-RE and DVD-Video discs ( p age 31). Adjusting the audio Adjusting the Audio DRC Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Cont r ol) has the effect of p laying loud sounds softly and soft sounds loudly. Adjust the setting fo r exam p le when viewing movies late at night and the di alogs a r e difficult to hear . 1 During playback, display the TOOLS menu. P r ess TOOLS. 2 Select and set Audio Adjust. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select and set Audio DRC. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 4 Adjust the setting. Use  / to sw itch between Off , Low, M edium, High and Auto .  Closing the Audio DRC screen P r ess ENTER o r HOME MENU. Note • This only affects the Dol by T r ueHD, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby Digital audi o signals of BDs and DVDs. • When Auto is selected, the setting has the same effect as High o r Off fo r Dolb y T r ueHD signals, de p ending on the content. Fo r Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby Digital, the setting has the same effect as Off . • Audio DRC affects the audio sig nals out p ut f r om the following a udio out p ut te r minals: – Analog audio signals out p ut f r om the AUDIO OUT te r minals . –L i n e a r PCM audio signals outp ut fr om the DIGITAL OUT te r minal or HDMI OUT te r minal. • The effect may be weak fo r some discs. Adjusting the output level of the different speakers during BD/DVD playback (Channel Level) Caution • Channel Level of the s p eake r s set to None o r No at Speaker Setup cannot be adjusted ( p age 47). 1 During playback, disp lay the TOOLS menu. P r ess TOOLS. 2 Selec t and set Audio Adjust. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Selec t and set Channel Level. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 4 Adjust the output level. Use  / to select,  / to adjust. The out p ut levels of the L , C , R , SL , SR , SBL , SBR and SW s p eake r s can be adjusted within the r ange of –6.0 dB to 6.0 dB. 5 Press ENTER to set. Note •T h e a d j u s t m e n t o f Channel Level is only a pp licable to the sound out p ut f r om AUDIO OUT . • This cannot be adjusted when in th e following c ases: – Output Terminal is set to HDMI o r DI GITAL AUDIO ( p ag e 51). – Audio Output Mode is set to 2 Ch annel ( p age 43). TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN ENTER L C R SR SBR SBL SL SW 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 40 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
41 En 06 – Channel Level is set to Fix ( p age 4 3).  Closing the Channel Level screen P r ess HOME MENU. Adjusting the audio delay (Lip Sync) Adjust the audio delay fo r the selected video out p ut te r minal if the video and audio a r e not synch r onized. 1 During playback, display the TOOLS menu. P r ess TOOLS. 2 Select and set Audio Adjust. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Sele ct and set Lip Sync. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 4 Select Auto or Manual. Use  / to selec t. •A u t o – The p layer automatically adjusts the timing of the video and audio when con nected to a device equi pp ed with the HDMI Auto Li p sync Co rr ection featu r e using an HD MI cable. •M a n u a l – Adjust manually while viewing the video . If you have selected Manual , pr oceed to ste p 5. 5 Adjusting the am ount of a udio dela y. P r ess  , then use /  to adjust. The audio delay can be adjusted f rom 0 to 250 ms in ste p s of 5 ms. Note •T h e Lip Sync adjustment is only a pp licable to the out p ut te r mi nal se t at Output Terminal ( p age 51). • The sound may be inte rr u p t ed while setting the delay.  Closing the Lip Sync screen P r ess ENTER o r HOME MENU. Lip Sync Manual 100 ms 0 50 150 100 200 250 V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 41 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
07 42 En Chapter 7 Detailed settings Changing the settings Operating the Initial Setup screen 1 When playback is stopped, display the Home Menu screen. P r ess HO ME MENU. 2 Selec t and set Initial Setup. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Selec t the item and change the setti ng. Use  / / /  to select, then pr ess ENTER .  Closing the Initial Setup screen P r ess HO ME MENU. Note • Items that cannot be changed a r e indicated in g r ay. The items that can be selected de p end on the p layer ’s status. • In O p tions, the facto r y default sett ings a r e indicated in bold. VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT  16:9 (Widescreen)  F ull  Letter Box Initial Setup BD PLAYER TV Aspect Ratio 4:3 Video Out DVD 16:9 Video Out Video Out Audio Out Speakers HDMI Network Language Data Management Setup Navigator Setting Options Explanatio n Video Out TV As p ect Ratio 16:9 (Widescreen ) Select this when connected to a wide (16:9) TV. 4:3 (Standa r d) Select this when con nected to a conven tional TV. 4:3 Video Out Full 4:3 p ictu r es a r e di s p layed ove r the enti r e sc r een. No r mal 4:3 p ictur es ar e disp layed with ver tical black bar s along the sides. Select this when you cannot switch the as p ect r atio to 4:3 on the TV. 4:3 Vide o Out is only valid when TV Aspect Ratio is set to 16:9 (Wid escreen) . DVD 16:9 Vi deo Out Letter Bo x 16:9 p ictu r es a r e dis p layed with black ba r s at the to p and bottom when viewing on a 4:3 sc r een. Pan & Scan The p ictu r e is disp layed over the entir e sc r een, with the left and r ight sides of the 16:9 p ictur e c r o pp ed. Select th is to view 4:3 p ic tu r es ove r the enti r e sc r een. Fo r some discs, the p ictu r e will be dis p layed in the Letter Box mode even if Pan & Scan is set. • DVD 16:9 Video Out is only val id when TV Aspect Ratio is set to 4:3 (Standa rd) . • DVD 16:9 Video Out is only valid when p laying 16:9 p ictu r es of DVD-V ideo o r DVD-R/-RW (VR fo r mat) discs. When othe r 16:9 p ictur es ar e p layed, they ar e outp ut in the Letter Box mode. V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 42 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
43 En 07 Video Out NTSC on PAL TV On Select this when a TV that only su pp o r ts PAL is connected. The p ictu r e is dis p layed co rr ectly when p laying a disc r eco r ded with a f r ame/field r ate ot her than 50 Hz. Off Select this when connecte d to an NTSC-com p atible TV. • Many r ecent PAL TVs su pp o r t the in p ut of NTSC signals, in which c ase this can be set to Off . Also check you r TV’s o p er at ing inst r uctions. Audio O ut Dolby Di gital Ou t * Only valid fo r the DIGITA L OUT te r minal. Dolby Digital 1 Dolby Digital audio signals a r e out p ut. With BD-ROMs, the seconda r y audio and inte r active au dio ar e mixe d for outp ut. Dolby Digital 2 Dolby Digi tal audio si gnals a r e out p ut. With BD-ROMs, the sign als a r e out p ut without mixing the seconda r y audio and inte r active audio sign als. Dolby Digital  PCM Select this when the connected AV r ecei ve r o r am p lifie r , etc., is not com p atible with Dolby D igital audio sign als. The Dolby Digita l audio signals a r e conve r ted in to linea r PCM audio signals fo r out p ut. DTS Out * Only valid fo r the DIGITA L OUT te r minal. DTS 1 DTS Digital Su rr ound audio signals a r e out p ut. With BD-ROMs, the seconda r y audi o and inte r ac tive audio a r e mixed fo r out p ut . DTS 2 DTS Digital Su rr ound audio signals a r e outp ut. With BD-ROMs, the signals a r e out p ut without mixing the secon da r y audio an d inte r active audio sig nals. DTS  PCM Select this when the connected AV r ecei ve r o r am p lifie r , etc., is not com p atible with DTS Digital Su rr ou nd audio signal s. The DTS Digital Su rr ound au dio signals a r e conve r ted into linea r PCM audio signals f o r out p ut. AAC Out * Only valid fo r the DIGITA L OUT te r minal. AAC Select this when the connected AV r ecei ve r o r am p lifie r , etc., is com p atible with AAC audio signals. The AAC audio signals a r e outp ut. AAC  PCM Select this when the connected AV r ecei ve r o r am p lifie r , etc., is not com p atible with AAC audio sign als. The AAC audio signals a r e conve r ted into linea r PCM audio sign als fo r out p ut. DTS Downm ix Stereo DTS-HD Maste r Audio signals, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals o r DTS Digital Su rr ound audio signals conve r ted to linea r PCM audio signa ls a r e conve r ted in to 2-channel (s te r eo) signal s fo r out p ut. Lt/Rt DTS-HD Maste r Audio signals, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio signals o r DTS Digital Su rr ound audio signals conve r ted to linea r PCM audio signa ls a r e conve r ted into 2-channel signals com p atible with Dolby Su rr ound fo r out p ut (when the connected AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r , etc., is com p atible with Dolby P r o Logic, the AV r eceiver or am p lifier out p ut s the linea r PCM audio signals as su rr ound audio signals). S p eake rs Audio Out p ut Mode * Only valid fo r the AUDIO OUT te r minals. 2 Channe l Select this when the TV’s analog 2-chan nel (ste r eo) a udio in p ut te r minals a r e connected to the p layer ’s AUDIO OUT ter minals. Multi-channel Select this when the multi-channel audio in p ut te r minals of an AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r , etc., ar e connec ted to the p laye r ’s AUDIO OUT ter minals. S p eake r Setu p * Only valid fo r the AUDIO OUT te r minals. When an AV r eceiver or am p lifier , etc., is connected to the p layer ’s AUDIO OUT ter minals, set whethe r o r not s peake rs a r e connected to an AV r eceiver or am p lifier , et c., thei r size and thei r c r ossove r f r equ ency. Fo r details, see Changing the sp eaker setu p on p age 47. S p eake r Distance * Only valid fo r the AUDIO OUT te r minals. S p ecify the distance of you r s p eake r s f r om you r listening p osition (p age 47). Channel Level * Only valid fo r the AUDIO OUT te r minals. Fix The out p ut fo r the var ious sp eaker s is set to the maximum. Va r iable The out p ut le vel of the va r ious s p eaker s is set within the r ange of –6.0 dB to 6.0 dB (in 0.5 dB ste p s) (p age 47). Setting Options Explanatio n V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 43 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
07 44 En HDMI HDMI High S p eed T r ansmission On Select this when connec ted with a High S p eed HDMI™ cable ( p age 18). Off Select this when connecte d with a Standa r d HDMI™ cable ( p age 18) . The p layer ’s setting scr een is closed if the o utp ut video r esolution is switch ed by changing the HDMI High Speed Transmission setting. HDMI Colo r Sp ace Auto Select this to automatically switch the video out p ut between Y CbCr and RG B signals acco r ding to t he connecte d equi p ment. YCbC r 4:4:4 Select this to out p ut the video signals as YCbC r 4:4:4 si gnals. YCbC r 4:2:2 Select this to out p ut the video signals as YCbC r 4:2:2 si gnals. RGB (16 to 235) Select this to out p ut the video signals as RGB si gna ls. Choose this if the colo r s seem too dens e and all the da r k colo r s a r e dis p layed in a unifo r m black when RGB (0 to 2 55) is selecte d. RGB (0 to 255) Select this to out p ut the video signals as RGB si gnals. Choose thi s if the colo r s seem too fa int and the b lack seems too b r ight when RGB (16 to 2 35) is selected. No r mally it is r ecommended to se t this to Au to . When set to Auto , the o p timum video signals fo r you r TV a r e out p ut. HDMI Audio Out Auto The signals a r e out p ut with as many audio cha nnels as p ossible. In cases when the numbe r of channels does no t decr ease whe n the signal s ar e outp ut as such without conve r ti ng them to li nea r PCM, they a r e ou t p ut as such ( p age 52). PCM Select this when you want the seconda r y audio a nd inte r active a udio signals to be mixed fo r out p ut o r when you want to out p ut pr ior itizing sam p ling f r equency o ve r the numbe r of channels ( p age 52). Off Select this when you do not want to out p ut the audi o f r om the HDMI out p ut te r minal. KURO LINK On Select this to cont r ol the p laye r with the r emote con t r ol of the AV device connected using an HDMI cable. Also r efer to About KURO LINK function on p age 19. Off Select this when you do not want to co nt r ol the p layer with the r emote co nt r ol of the AV device connect ed using an HDMI cable. Dis p lay Powe r On * Only valid when KURO LINK is set to On . On Select this when you wa nt the TV to t u r n on each time p layback is sta r ted o r the Home Men u o r Home Media Galle r y is dis p laye d on the p layer . Off Select this when you do not wa nt the TV to tu r n on each time p layback is sta r ted o r the Home Menu o r Home Media Galle r y is dis p layed on the p layer . Dis p lay Powe r Off * Only valid when KURO LINK is set to On . On Select this when you want the p layer ’s p ower to tur n off together with the TV’s p ower . Off Select this when you do not want th e p layer ’s p ower to tu r n off togethe r with the TV’s p ower . PQLS * Only valid when KURO LINK is set to On . Auto Enables PQLS function ( p age 19) . Off Disables PQLS func tion ( p ag e 19). Netwo r k IP Add r ess Select this to set the IP add r ess of the p layer and DNS ser ver ( p age 48 ). P r oxy Se r ve r Only set the pr oxy se r ver if so inst r ucted by you r Inte r net se r vice pr ovider ( p age 4 8 ). Dis p lay Netwo r k Configu r ation Select this to dis p lay a list of the netwo r k settings ( p age 49 ). Connection Test Select this to test the netwo r k connection ( p age 49). Language OSD Language English Select this to set t he language of the on-sc r een dis p lays to English. available languages Choose a language fo r the on-sc r een dis p lays f r om the liste d languages . Audio Language * Fo r some discs, it may not be p ossible to change to the selected language. English Select this to set both the BD-ROM and DVD-Vi deo default a udio language to English. available languages Choose a language f r om the listed languages to set the defa ult audio language fo r BD-ROM and DVD-V ideo p layback. Othe r Continue to the n ext sc r een to set the default audio langua ge fo r BD-ROM and DVD-V ideo p layback. You c an select the langua ge name o r ente r the code numbe r (se e on p age 54 fo r the code table). If a language not r ecor ded on th e BD/DVD is set , one of the r ecor ded la nguages is automatically selected and p layed. Setting Options Explanatio n V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 44 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
45 En 07 Language Subtitle L anguage * Fo r some discs, it may not be p ossible to change to the selected language. English Select this to set t he default subti tle language fo r BD-ROM and DVD-Vi deo p layback to English. available languages Choose a language f r om the listed languages to set the defa ult subtitle language fo r BD-ROM and DVD-V ideo p layback. Othe r Continue to the n ext sc r een to set the de fault subti tle language fo r BD-ROM and DVD-V ideo p layback. You c an select the langua ge name o r ente r the code numbe r (se e on p age 54 fo r the code table). If a language not r ecor ded on th e BD/DVD is set , one of the r ecor ded la nguages is automatically selected and p layed. BDMV/DVD-Video Menu Lang. * Fo r some discs, it may not be p ossible to change to the selected language. w/Subtitle Language Sets the language of BD-ROM and DVD-Video me nus to the same as that set fo r the subtitle language. available languages Choose a language f r om the listed l anguages to se t the default la nguage fo r BD-ROM and DVD-Video menus. Othe r Continue to the n ext sc r een to set t he default m enu language fo r BD-ROM and DVD-Video men us. You can select the langua ge name o r ente r the code numbe r (see on p age 54 for the code tab le). If a language not r ecor ded on th e BD/DVD is set , one of the r ecor ded la nguages is automatically selected and p layed. Subtitle Di s p lay On Select this to disp lay the subtitles. Off Select this if you do no t want to dis p lay th e subtitles. Note that on some discs the subtitles a r e dis p layed by fo r ce. Data Manageme nt Individual/Sha r ed Data E r ase Use this to dis p lay the l ist of data us ed fo r the B D-LIVE and BONUSV IEW function s and to e r ase the data ( p age 49). Remove the disc f r om the disc t r ay when changing the setting. A pp lication Data E r ase Use this to e r ase bookma r ks, high sco r es of games and othe r da ta ( p age 49). Remove the disc f r om the disc t r ay when changing the setting. Sto r age Fo r mat Select this to fo r mat the sto r age devi ce on which th e data used by the BD-LIVE an d BONUSVIE W functions is st o r ed ( p age 49). Remove the disc f r om the disc t r ay when changing the setting. Setu p Navigato r Sta r t making the settings us ing the Setu p Navigato r menu. Fo r details, see Making settings using the Setup Navigator menu on p age 23. Playback Still Pict u r e Field This eliminates instability of the p ictur e when p layback is p aused. F r ame This makes p ictu r es clea r when p layback is p aused, but instability may be obse r ved. Auto Field o r Frame is switched automatically acco r ding to the disc or file be ing p layed. Angle/Seco nda r y Indicato r On Select this to dis p l ay the angle ma r k, seconda r y video ma r k and seconda r y audio ma r k on the TV sc r een ( p ages 30 and 31). Off Select this if you do not want to dis p lay the angle mar k, secondar y video mar k and seconda r y audio ma r k on the T V sc r een. Hyb r id Disc Playback BD The BD laye r of hyb r id discs with two o r mo r e laye r s (BD and DVD o r CD) is p layed. DVD The DVD laye r of hyb r id discs with two o r mo r e laye r s (BD and DVD) is p layed. If the r e is no DVD laye r , the BD laye r is p layed. CD The CD laye r of hyb r id discs with two o r mo r e laye r s (BD and CD) is p layed. If the r e is no CD laye r , the BD la ye r is p layed. Remove the disc f r om the disc t r ay when changing the setting. BDMV/BDAV Playback P r io r ity BDMV Select this to p lay the BDMV fo r mat on BD-R/-RE discs co ntaining both BDMV and BDAV fo r mats. BDAV Select th is to p lay the BDAV for mat on BD-R/-RE discs containing both BDMV and BDAV fo r mats. Remove the disc f r om the disc t r ay when changing the setting. Setting Options Explanatio n V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 45 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
07 46 En Pa r ental Lock Set Passwo r d (Chang e Passwo r d) Registe r (change) the p asswo r d fo r p ar ental lock settings o r fo r unlocking to p lay DVD-Video with p ar ental lock fe atu r e ( p age 50) . DVD-Vide o Pa r ental Lock Change the p layer ’s p ar ental lock level ( p age 50) . BDMV Pa r ental Lock Change the r estr icted age ( p age 50). Count r y Code Change the Count r y/Ar ea code ( p ag e 50). O p tions Out p ut Te r minal Set the te r minals f r om which the p laye r ’s video and audio signals a r e to be out p ut ( p age 51). On Sc r een Dis p lay On Select this to dis p lay the o p er ation indicato r s (Play, Sto p , etc.) on th e TV sc r een. Off Select this if you do not wan t to dis p lay the op er ation indicator s (Play, Stop , etc.) on the TV s c r een. Sc r een Save r On The black sc r een (t he sc r een save r ) is dis p layed, if the r e is no o p er ation fo r ove r 1 minute afte r p layback is sto pp ed or p aused. The sc reen save r is automatically activated if th e r e is no o p er ation fo r ov e r 1 minute afte r the Home Menu o r Home Media Galle r y is dis p layed while p laying a BD or DVD. With audio CDs a nd audio fi les, the sc r een save r is automatically ac tivated if no button is o p er ated fo r ove r 1 minute, even while t he audio CD o r aud io file is p laying. The sc r een save r tu r ns of f when an o p eration is p er for med on the p layer or r emote contr ol . Off The sc r een saver is not activa ted. Auto Powe r Off On Select this to tu r n the p ower off automatic ally (the p ower tu r ns off automatically if no o p er at ion is p er for med fo r ove r 30 minutes ). Off Select this if you do not wan t the p ower to tur n off automat ically. Softwa r e U p date The Softwa r e U p date function can check fo r and down load u p dated system softwa r e f r om the netwo r k ser ve r ( p age 51). Advanced Setu p Use this to make advan ced settin gs ( p age 55). Setting Options Explanatio n V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 46 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
47 En 07  Changing the speaker setup Set whethe r or not s p eaker s a r e connected to an AV r eceiver or amp li fier , etc., their size and their c r ossover f r equency. Thi s setting i s only valid f o r the AUDIO OUT te r minal s. When t he r e a r e no s p eaker s whose s p eaker size is set to Small , select Bypass fo r the cr ossover fr equency. When t he r e a re s p eaker s whose s p eaker size is set to Small , select the c r ossover f r equenc y ( Bypass cannot be selected). Caution •T h e Speaker Setup cannot be selected when Audio Output Mode is set to 2 Chann el . Change the setting to Multi-channel ( p age 43). 1 Sele ct and set Speakers  Spe aker Setup  Next Screen. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Selec t the speaker and chang e the setting. Use  / to select, then use  / to c hange th e setting . • L/R (f r ont left and r ight s p eake r s): Large / Small • C (cente r s p eake r ): Large/ Small/ None • SL/SR (left and r ight s u rr ound s p eake r s): Large/ Small / None • SBL/SB R (left and r ight su rr ound back s p eake r s): Large / Sma ll / None • SW (subwoofe r ): Yes / No • Crossover : Bypass/ 50 Hz/ 80 Hz / 10 0 Hz /150 H z Note •D e p ending on the combination of settings of the diffe r ent s p eake r s, the settings of s p eake r s othe r than the one you have cha nged may also change automatically. •W h e n a s u b w o o f e r with a filter byp ass function is connected and the r e is no s p eak er whose s p eaker size is set to Small , if the subwoofe r ’s filte r is set to be by p assed, the p laye r ’s high pr ecision digital filte r is used. In this case, set the c r ossover fr equency to something othe r than Bypass . •U p on p ur chase, the c r ossover fr equency is set to Bypass .  Adjusting the distance of the different speakers Adjust the distance be tween you and the diffe r ent s p eake r s. This setting is only valid for the AUDIO OUT te r minals . Caution • This cannot be selected when Audio Outp ut Mode is set to 2 Channel . Change the setting to Mult i- channel ( p age 43). • Speaker Distance of the s p eake r s set to None o r No at Speaker Setup cannot be adjusted (above). 1 Selec t and set Speakers  Speaker Distance  Next Screen. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Selec t the speaker and adjust the distance . Use  / to select, then use  / to adjust. • The distance of all the s p eaker s can b e set to between 1 inch and 45 feet, in units of 1 inch.  Adjusting the outp ut level of the different speakers (Channel Level) Adjust each out p ut level of the diffe r ent s p eaker s by using test tones. This settin g is only va lid fo r the AUDIO OUT te r minals. Caution • This cannot be selected when Audio Outp ut Mode is set to 2 Channel . Change the setting to Mult i- channel ( p age 43). • Channel Level of the s p eake r s set to None o r No at Speaker Setup cannot be adjusted (above). • Test tones a r e out p ut. Lowe r the volume of the device connected to the p layer . 1 Selec t and set Speakers  Channel L evel, then Fix or Variable. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . • Fix – The out p ut level of al l the s p eake r s is set to th e maximum. • Variable – The out p ut le vel of all the s p eake r s is set 6.0 dB lowe r than when Fix is selected. F r om this p oint, the o ut p ut levels of the L , C , R , SL , SR , SBL , SB R and SW s p eake r s can be adjusted within the r ange of –6.0 dB to 6.0 dB. If you have selected Variable , pr oceed to ste p 2. L/R C SL/SR SBL/SBR SW Large Large Large Large Yes Crossover Bypass Speaker Setup BD PLAYER L C R SR SBR SBL SL SW Speaker Distance BD PLAYER 10’00” 10’00” 10’00” 10’00” 10’00” 10’00” 10’00” 10’00” V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 47 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
07 48 En 2 Select and set the meth od for switching the speaker to be adjusted. Use  / to select , then pr ess ENTER . • Auto – Switch the s p eake r to be adjusted automatically. • Manual – Switch the s p eake r to be adjust ed manually. 3 Adjust the output level. Use  / to select,  / to adjust. Note • You can also adjust whi le listening to the sound being p layed (p age 40). • The volume of the test tones out p ut f r om the subwoofe r may seem lowe r than the tones out p ut f r om the othe r channels. Adjust the subwoofe r based on the sound du r ing p layback ( p age 40). •W h e n Auto is selecte d, the s p eaker cannot be selected with  / . In this case, test tones a r e not out p ut f r om the subwoofe r .  Setting the IP address 1 Select and set Network  IP Address  Next Screen. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Set IP address. Use  / / / to set the IP add r ess of the p layer o r DNS se r ve r , then pr ess ENTER . • Auto Set IP Address On – The p layer ’s IP addr ess is obtained automatically. Select this when using a b r oadband r outer or br oadband modem that has a DHCP (Dynamic Host Confi gu r ation P r otocol) se r ver function. This p la yer ’s IP add r ess will automatically be allocat ed f r om the DHCP se r ver . Off – The p layer ’s IP addr ess must be set m anually. Use the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to in p ut the IP add r ess, subnet mask and default gateway. • Auto Set DNS Server Addr ess On – The DNS se r ver ’s IP addr ess is obtained automatically. Off – The DNS se r ve r ’s IP add r ess must be set manually. Use the numbe r b u t t o n s ( 0 t o 9 ) t o i n p ut the DNS se r ver ’s IP add r ess sti p ulated by you r Inte r net se r vice pr ovide r . Note • When Auto Set IP Address is set to Off , Auto Set DNS Server Address is also se t to Off . •F o r infor m a t i o n o n D H C P s e r ver fu nction, r efer to the netwo r k device’s o p er ating inst r uctions. • You may need to co ntact you r Inte r net se r vice pr ovide r or networ k administr ator when inp utting the IP add r ess manually.  Setting the proxy server Only set the pr oxy se r ver if so inst r ucted by you r Inte r net se r vice pr ovide r . 1 Selec t and set Network  Proxy Server  Next Screen. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Selec t and set Use or Not use at Proxy Serve r. Use  / to change, then pr ess  . • Use – Select this when using a pr oxy se r ve r. • Not use – Select this when not using a pr oxy se r ve r. If you have selected Use , pr oceed to s te p 3. 3 Selec t and set Server Selec t Method. Use  / to change, then pr ess  . • IP Addre ss – In p ut the IP add r ess. • Server Name – In p ut the se r ve r name. 4 Input IP Add ress or Server Name. Use the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to in p ut the numbe r if you se le ct IP add r ess by ste p 3. Use  / to move the cu r sor . Use the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to in p ut cha r acter s if you select S e r ver Name by ste p 3. The cha r acter s that can be in p ut fo r the se r ver name a r e listed on the table below. P r essing a button r ep eatedly cycles th r ough the cha r acter s shown. L C R SR SBR SBL SL SW 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB Channel Level BD PLAYER IP Address Auto Set IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Auto Set DNS Server Address DNS Server (Primary) DNS Server (Secondar y) Off Network BD PLAYER  Off   Use  Proxy Server Proxy Server Server Select Method Server Name P ort Number Server Name Network BD PLAYER V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 48 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
49 En 07 • If you want to en te r two cha r acter s in succession that a r e both on the same button (fo r exam p le a P and an R ), pr ess  afte r inp utti ng the fi r st cha r acter then in p ut the second cha r acte r . •U s e CLEAR to delete the last cha r ac ter . •U s e  / to move the dis p layed char acter s when all the in p ut cha r acter s cannot be dis p layed. 5 Input Port Numb er. P r ess  , use the nu mbe r buttons (0 to 9) to inp ut the numbe r . 6 Press ENTER to set.  Displaying the network settings  Select and set Network  Display Network Configuration  Next Screen. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . The MAC add r ess, IP add r ess, subnet mask, de fault gateway and DNS se r ver ( pr imar y and seconda r y) settings a r e dis p layed. When Auto Set IP Address is set to On , the values obtained a utomatically a r e dis p layed. Note • “0.0.0.0” is dis p layed when each IP add r ess ha s not been set.  Testing the network connection  Select and set Network  Connection Test  Start. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . “Netwo r k connection test com p leted successfully.” is dis p layed once the test is com p leted. If any othe r message is dis p layed, ch eck the connections and/or settings ( p ages 22 and 48).  Changing to other language at language setting 1 Sele ct and set Language. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Sele ct and set Audio Language, Subtitle Language or BDMV/DVD -Video Menu Lang. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select and set Other. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 4 Chan ge the language. Use  / to change, then pr ess ENTER . • The language can also be change d using the numbe r buttons. Use  / to move the cu r so r to Number , use the numbe r bu tt on s (0 t o 9) to in p ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER . Refe r to Language Code Tabl e and Country/Area Code Table on p age 54. Note • If a language not r ecor ded on the BD/DVD is set, one of the r ecor ded languages is automatically selected and p layed.  Erasing data that has been added to BDs and application data Use this pr ocedu r e to e r ase data that has been added t o BDs (data downlo aded with the BD-LIVE f unction and data used wit h the BON USVIEW fun ction) and a pp licati on data. Caution •S o m e t i m e i s r equir ed to e r ase the data. • Do not un p lug the p ower co r d while data is being e r ased. •T h i s o p e r ation does not wor k when a disc is loaded. 1 Selec t and set Data Management. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Selec t and set the erase menu. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . • Individual/Shar ed Data Erase Use this pr ocedu r e to select and e r ase data downloaded with the BD-LIV E function and data used with the BONUSVIEW functi on ( p age 9) . Select Next Screen , then pr ess ENTER . The list sc r een a pp ea rs. Key Characters Key Characters 1 1 . – 6 m n o 6 2 a b c 2 7 p q r s 7 3 d e f 3 8 t u v 8 4 g h i 4 9 w x y z 9 5 j k l 5 0 0 Number Audio Language Initial Setup BD PLAYER Language Video Out Audio Out Speakers HDMI Network Language Data Management Setup Navigator English 05 1 4 Individual/Shared Data Erase BD PLAYER 15 items Shared Data Disc Name 1 Disc Name 2 Disc Name 3 Disc Name 4 Disc Name 5 Disc Name 6 Disc Name 7 V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 49 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
07 50 En When a disc name is selected, the data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and data used with the BONUSVIEW is e r ased. When Shared Data is selected, all the data downloaded with the BD-LIVE function and not associated to discs is e r ased. Use  / to select the data to be e r ased, then pr ess ENTER . • Applica tion Data Erase Use this pr ocedu r e to e r ase BD-ROM a pp lication data (high sco r es of ga mes, bo okma r ks data, etc.). Select Start , then pr ess ENTER . • Storage Format Use this pr ocedu r e to fo r mat the sto r age in which the data downl oaded with the B D-LIVE fu nction and da ta used with the BONUSVIEW function is sto r ed ( p age 9). When this is done, all the data on the extern al storage device is erased. Select Start , then pr ess ENTER . 3 Select Yes, then pres s ENTER . Use  / to select , then pr ess ENTER .  Registering or Changing the password Use this pr ocedu r e to r egister or change the code numbe r r equi r ed fo r the Pa r ental Lock settings. 1 Selec t and set Parental Lock  Set Password  Next Screen. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Input the pa ssword. Use the numbe r button s (0 to 9) o r /  to in p ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER to set. Use  / to move th e cu r so r . 3 Re-in put the password. Use the numbe r button s (0 to 9) o r /  to in p ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER to set. Use  / to move th e cu r so r . •T o c h a n g e t h e p asswor d, in p ut the pr eviously r egister ed p ass wo r d, then in p ut th e new p asswor d. Note •W e r ecommend making a note of the p asswor d. • If you fo r get th e p asswor d, r eset the p layer to the facto r y default setting, then r egiste r the passwo r d again ( p age 51).  Changing the Parental Lock level for viewing DVDs Some DVD-Video discs containing scenes of violence, fo r exam p le, have Pa r ental Lock lev els (check th e indicati ons on the disc’s jacket o r elsewhe r e). To r estr ict viewing these discs, set the p layer ’s level to the level lowe r than the discs. 1 Selec t and set Parental Lock  DVD-Video Parental Lock  Next Screen. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Input the pa ssword. Use the numbe r butt ons (0 to 9) o r /  to inp ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER to set. Use  / to mo ve the cu r so r . 3 Chan ge the level. Use  / to change, then pr ess ENTER to set. Note • The level can be set to Off o r between Level1 and Level8 . When set to Off , viewing is not r estr icted.  Changing the Age Restriction for viewing BD-ROMs Fo r BD-ROMs containing scenes of violence, fo r exam p le, viewing can be r estr icted by setting an age r estr iction fo r the BD-ROMs . 1 Selec t and set Parental Lock  BDMV Parental Lock  Next Screen. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Input the pa ssword. Use the numbe r butt ons (0 to 9) o r /  to inp ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER to set. Use  / to mo ve the cu r so r . 3 Change the age. Use the numbe r butt ons (0 to 9) o r /  to inp ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER to set. Use  / to mo ve the cu r so r . Note • When Age Restriction is set to 255 , viewing is not r estr icted.  Changing the Country/Area code 1 Selec t and set Parental Lock  Country Code  Next Screen. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Input the pa ssword. Use the numbe r butt ons (0 to 9) o r /  to inp ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER to set. Use  / to mo ve the cu r so r . 3 Change the country/area code. Use  / to change, then pr ess ENTER to set. • The the count r y/ar ea code can also be changed using the numbe r buttons. Use  / to move the cu r sor to Number , use the numbe r buttons (0 to 9) to inp ut the numbe r , then pr ess ENTER . Refe r to Language Code Table and Country/Area Co de Table on p age 54. V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 50 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
51 En 07  Setting the output terminals Set the te r minals f r om which the p layer ’s video and audi o signals a r e to be out p ut. 1 Select and set Options  Output Termina l  Next Screen. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 2 Select and set the v ideo and au dio output terminal s. Select the actually connected video and audi o out p ut te r minal s. Use  / / / to select, then pr ess ENTER . Fo r details on the settings, r efe r to ste p 4 on p age 23. When COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO is selected for Video , no so und is out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal (a wa r ning message is dis p layed). Software updating The softwa r e of the p layer can b e u pdated by connecting it to the Int e r net using a LA N cable. Befo r e u p dating th e softwa r e, make su r e th at you have connected the p layer to the netwo rk and made the necessa r y settings ( p ages 22 and 48). Caution • 10 to 20 minutes a r e r equir ed to up date the softwar e. The p ictu r e tu r ns off du r ing this pr ocess, but do not un p lug the p owe r co r d until the f r ont p anel dis p lay tu r ns off. •W h e n t h e f r ont p anel disp lay is off, tur n it on with FL DIMMER . When u p dating the p layer ’s soft wa r e with the f r ont p anel d is p lay off, do not un p lug t he p ower co r d until th e FL OFF indicato r tu r ns off. •D e p ending on the Inte r net connection conditions, downloading may take a long tim e. •D o n o t u n p lug the p ower cor d dur ing softwar e u p dating. Doing so may r esult in an o pe r ation f ailu r e. •T h e r e ar e two pr ocesses for softwar e up dating, downloading and u p dati ng. Both pr ocesses may take a ce r tain p er iod of t ime. •O t h e r op er ations ar e defeated dur ing softwar e u p dating. Fu r the r mo r e u p dating pr ocess cannot be canceled. Note •S t e p s 1 to 4 a r e the o p er ations p er fo r med by the use r (they a r e intended to download the so ftwa r e f r om the Inte r net). •S t e p s 5 to 7 a r e the o p er ations p er fo r med (automati cally) by the p layer (they a r e intended to u p date the softwa r e). 1 When pla yback is stopped, display the Home Menu screen. P r ess HOME MENU. 2 Select and set Init ial Setup. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Selec t and set Options  Software Update  Start. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . •I f t h e p la yer is al r eady r unning the latest softwar e, the message “The p layer ’s softwa r e is u p to date a nd does not need u p dating.” is dis p layed. 4 Selec t and set Yes. Use  / to sele ct Yes , then pr ess ENTER . •T h e h e l p menu is disp layed if the p laye r cannot co nnect to the Inte r net. Check the co nnection s and settings ( p ages 22 and 48). 5 Downloading of the softwar e start. The softwa r e download status is dis p layed on the scr een . •D e p ending on the I nter net connection conditio ns, softwa r e downloading may take a ce r tain p er iod of time. 6 Updating starts. “ DOWNLOAD ” and a numbe r a r e dis p la yed on the f r ont p anel disp lay, after which the disp lay switches alter nately between this and “ DATA CHECK ”, “ WRT IPL”, “ WRT SD ”, “ WRT KRNL ”, “ WRT SYS1”, “ WRT SYS2 ”, “ WRT DRV ” and “ WRT FLC ”. • S o f t w a r e up da ting may ta ke a cer tain p er iod o f time. 7 Updati ng completes. The f r ont p anel disp lay shows “ DOWNLOA D OK ” and the p layer tur ns off aut omatically. Restoring all the settings to the factory default settings 1 Check that the pl ayer’s power is turned on. 2 Check that there is no di sc in the player. If the r e is a disc in the p lay er , r emove it. 3 While pressing  , press  STANDBY/ON. O pe r ate using the butto ns on the p laye r ’s f r ont p anel. Note •A f t e r r esto r ing all th e settin gs to the fac tor y default settings, use Setup Navigator to r eset the p laye r ( p age 23). • When all the settings a r e r estor ed to the facto r y defaults, all the data fo r the seconda r y video (Pictu r e- in-Pictu r e), seconda r y audio, bookma r ks, etc., is e r ased. • If a disc is lo aded, the set tings cannot be r estor ed to the facto r y def aults by p er for ming the above o pe r ation. V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 51 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
07 52 En About the audio output settings The audio signals that a r e out p ut diffe r acco r ding to the audio fo r mat r ecorded on the disc and the p layer ’s settings. Check on the table below. Caution •W h e n ANALOG AUDIO is sel ected at Out put Terminal , no audio signals a re out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal o r DIGIT AL OUT te r minal ( p ages 23 and 51). •W h e n HDMI o r DIGITAL AUDIO is selected at Output Terminal , linea r PCM audio signals (2 channels) a r e out p ut f r om all te r minals othe r than the ones selected at Output Terminal ( p ages 23 and 51). • The output from all termin als other than the ones selected for Audio does not sound as intended by the content provider. Audio form at AUDIO OUT terminals DIGITAL OUT termina l HDMI OUT terminal 2ch 1 1. When Audio Output Mode is set to 2 Channel o r Multi-ch annel (p age 43). Multi-channel 1 Converted to linear PCM audio 2 2. When Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital  PCM , DTS Out is set to DTS  PCM , o r AAC Out is set to AAC  PCM ( p age 43). Not converte d to linear PCM audio 3 3. When Dolby Digital Out is set to Dolby Digital 1 / Dolby Digital 2 , DTS Out is set to DTS 1/ DTS 2 o r AAC Out is set to AAC ( p age 43). PCM 4 4. When HDMI Audio Out is set to PCM o r Auto ( p age 44) . Auto 4 BD- ROM Dolby Digital Conve r ted to 2- channel audio 5.1-channel audio Conve r ted to 2- channel audio Dolby Digit al 5 5. When out p utting Dolby Digital o r DTS Digital Su rr ound bitst r eam with Dolby Digital Out set to Dolby Digital 2 and DTS Out set to DTS 2 , the seconda r y audio and inter active audio signals a r e not mixed fo r out p ut. 5.1-channel audio Dolby Digital 6,7 6. When out p utting the bitst r eam of Dolby T r ueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital, DT S-HD Maste r Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio o r DTS Digit al Su rr ound, the seconda r y audio and inte r active audio sign als a r e not mixed fo r out p ut. 7. If the connect ed HDMI devi ce is not com p atible with Dolby T r ueHD o r Dolby Digital Plus bitst r eam, the signals a r e out p ut in linea r PCM (7.1 channels) o r Dolby Digital bitst r eam. If the connec ted HDMI device is not com p atible with Dolby Digital bitst r eam, the signals a r e out p ut in linea r PCM (2 channels). Dolby Digital Plus 7.1-channel audio 7.1-channel audio Dolby Digital Plus 6,7 Dolby T r ueHD 7.1-channel audio 8 8. When the out p ut video r esolution is se t to 480i/576i o r 480 p /5 76p , the signals may be out p ut in linea r P C M ( 2 c h a n n e l s ) , d e p ending on HDMI High Sp eed Tran smiss ion setting and/o r the connected HDMI device ( p ag e 18). Dolby T r ueHD 6,7,9 DTS Digital Su rr ound 7.1-channel audio DTS Digital Su rr ound 5 7.1-channel audio DTS Digital Su rr ound 6,10 DTS-HD High Resolution Audio 7.1-channel audio 7.1-channel audio 8 DTS-HD High Resolution Audio 6,8,10 DTS-HD Maste r Audio DTS-HD Ma ste r Audio 6,10,11 Linea r PCM Conve r ted t o 2- channel audio 7.1-channel audio 8 BD-R/ -RE Dolby Digital Conve r ted to 2- channel audio 5.1-channel audio Conve r ted to 2- channel audio Dolby Digital 5.1-channel audio Dolby Digit al 7 MPEG-2 AAC MPEG-2 AA C MPEG-2 AA C MPEG 2-channel au dio Linea r PCM DVD- Video Dolby Digital Conve r ted to 2- channel audio 5.1-channel audio Conve r ted to 2- channel audio Dolby Digital 5.1-channel audio Dolby Digit al 7 DTS Digital Su rr ound DTS Digital Su rr ound DTS Digital Su rr ound 10 MPEG 2-channel au dio Linea r PCM DVD-R/ -RW (VR fo r mat) Dolby Digital Conve r ted to 2- channel audio 5.1-channel audio Conve r ted to 2- channel audio Dolby Digital 5.1-channel audio Dolby Digit al 7 MPEG 2-channel au dio Linea r PCM V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 52 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
53 En 07 Note •O n l y c o m p atible with 7.1-channel su rr ound bac k. 6.1-channel su rr ound back is o utp ut in 7.1 channels. In o ther cases, out p u t as audio signals of 5.1-ch annels o r less. •W h e n o u t p utting linear PCM audio signal s, if the numbe r of com p atible channels of t he connected HDMI device is lowe r , the si gnals a r e out p ut with the numbe r of chann els fo r which the device is com p atible. • The audio signals out p ut f r om the DIGITAL OUT te r minal have a sam p ling f r equency of 48 kHz (44.1 kHz fo r audio CDs). 9. When the out p ut video r esolution is set to 480i/576i o r 480 p /576p , the signals may be out p ut in linea r PCM (2 channels) o r Dolby Digital bitst r eam, de p ending on HDMI High Speed Transmission setting and/o r the conn ected HDMI de vice ( p age 18). 10. If the co nnected HD MI device i s not com p atible with DTS-HD Maste r Audio o r DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, the signals a r e out p ut in linea r PCM (7.1 channels) o r DTS Digital Su rr ound bitst r ea m. If the connec ted HDMI device is not com p atible with DTS Digital Su rr ound bitst r eam, the signals a r e out p ut in linea r PCM (2 channels). 11. When the out p ut video r esolution is set to 480i/576i o r 480 p /576p , the signals may be out p ut in linea r PCM (2 channels) o r DTS Digital Su rr ound, de p ending on HDMI High Speed Tr ansmiss ion setting and/o r the connect ed HDMI device. V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 53 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
07 54 En Language Code Table and Country/Area Code Table  Language Code Table Language name, language code, input code  Country/Area Code Table Count r y/ A r ea name, Country/Area code, input code Abkhazian, ab/abk, 0102 Afa r , aa/aar, 0101 Af r ikaans, af/afr, 0106 Albanian, sq/sqi, 1917 Amha r ic, am/amh, 0113 A r abic, ar/ara, 01 18 A r menian, hy/hye, 0825 Assamese, as/asm, 0119 Ayma r a, ay/aym, 0125 Aze r baijani, az/aze, 0126 Bashki r , ba/bak, 0201 Basque, eu/eus, 0521 Bela r usian, be/bel, 0205 Bengali, bn/ben, 0214 Biha r i, bh/bih, 0208 Bislama, bi/bis, 0209 B r eton, br/bre, 0218 Bulga r ian, bg/bul, 0207 Bu r mese, my/mya, 1325 Catalan, ca/cat, 030 1 Cent r al Khme r , km/khm , 1113 Chinese, zh/zho, 2608 Co r sican, co/cos, 0315 C r oatian, hr/hrv, 0818 Czech, cs/ces, 0319 Danish, da/dan, 0401 Dutch, nl/nld, 1412 Dzongkha, dz/dzo, 0426 English, en/eng, 0514 Es p er anto, eo/epo, 0515 Estonian, et/est, 0520 Finnish, fi/fin, 0609 Fijia n, fj/fi j, 0610 Fa r oese, fo/fao, 0615 F r ench, fr/fra, 0618 Galician, gl/glg, 0712 Geo r gian, ka/kat, 1101 Ge r man, de/deu, 0405 G r eek, el/ell, 0512 Gua r ani, gn /grn, 0714 Guja r ati, gu/guj, 0721 Hausa, ha/hau, 0801 Heb r ew, iw/heb, 0923 Hindi, hi/hin, 0809 Hunga r ian, hu/hun, 0821 Icelandic, is/i sl, 0919 Indonesian , in/ind, 0914 Inte r lingua, ia/ina, 0901 Inte r lingue, ie/ile, 0905 Inu p iaq, ik/ipk, 0911 I r ish, ga/gle, 0701 Italian, it/ita, 0920 Ja p anese, ja/jpn, 1001 Javanese, jw/jav, 1023 Kalaallisut, kl/kal, 1112 Kannada, kn/kan, 1114 Kashmi r i, ks/kas, 1119 Kazakh, kk/kaz, 1111 Kinya r wanda, rw/kin, 1823 Ki r ghiz, ky/kir, 112 5 Ko r ean, ko/kor, 1115 Ku r dish, ku/kur, 1121 Lao, lo/lao, 1215 Latin, la/ lat, 1201 Latvian, l v/lav, 1222 Lingala, ln/lin, 1214 Lithuanian, lt/lit, 1220 Macedonian, mk/mkd, 1311 Malagasy, mg/mlg, 1307 Malay, ms/msa, 1319 Malayalam, ml/mal, 13 12 Maltese, mt/mlt, 1320 Mao r i, mi/mri, 1309 Ma r athi, mr/mar, 1318 Mongolian, mn/mon, 1314 Moldavian, mo/mol, 13 15 Nau r u, na/nau, 1401 Ne p ali, ne/nep, 1405 No r wegian, no/nor, 1415 Occitan, oc/oci, 15 03 O r iya, or/ori, 1518 O r omo, om/orm, 15 13 Panjabi, pa/pan, 1601 Pe r sian, fa/fas, 0601 Polish, pl/pol, 1612 Po r tugues e, pt/por, 1620 Pushto, ps/pus, 1619 Quechua, qu/que, 1721 Romanian, ro/ron, 1815 Romansch, rm/roh, 1813 Rundi, rn/run, 1814 Russian, ru/rus, 1821 Samoan, sm/smo, 1913 Sango, sg/ sag, 1907 Sansk r it, sa/san, 1901 Scottish Gaelic, gd/gla, 0704 Se r bian, sr/srp, 1918 Se r bo-C r oatian, sh/-- -, 1908 Shona, sn/sna, 1914 Sindhi, sd/snd, 1904 Sinhalese, si/sin, 190 9 Sl ov ak, sk/ slk, 1911 Slovenian, sl/slv, 1912 Somali, so/som, 1915 Sotho, Southe r n, st/sot, 1 920 S p anish, es/spa, 0519 Sundanese, su/sun, 1921 Swahili, sw/swa, 1923 Swati, ss/ssw, 1919 Swedish, sv/swe, 1922 Tagalog, tl/tgl, 2012 Tajik, tg/tgk, 2007 Tamil, ta/tam, 2001 Tata r , tt/tat, 2020 Telugu, te/tel, 2005 Thai, th/tha, 2008 Tibetan, bo/bod, 0215 Tig r inya, ti/tir, 2009 Tonga (Tonga Islands), to/ton, 2015 Tsonga, ts/tso, 2019 Tswana, tn/tsn, 2014 Tu r kmen, tk/tuk, 2011 Tu r kish, tr/tur, 2018 Twi, tw/twi, 2023 Uk r ainian, uk/ukr, 2111 U r du, ur/urd, 2118 Uzbek, uz/uzb, 2126 Vietnamese, vi/vie, 2209 Vola p ük, vo/vol, 2215 Welsh, cy/cym, 032 5 Weste r n F r isian, fy/fry , 0625 Wolof, wo/wol, 2315 Xhosa, xh/xho, 2408 Yiddish, ji/yid, 1009 Yo r uba, yo/yor, 251 5 Zulu, zu/zul, 2621 Anguilla, ai, 0109 Antigua and Ba r buda, ag, 0107 A r genti na, ar, 0118 A r menia, am, 0113 Aust r alia, au, 0121 Aust r ia, at, 0120 Aze r baijan, az, 0126 Bahamas, bs, 0219 Ba r bados, bb, 0202 Bela r us, by, 0225 Belgium, be, 0205 Belize, bz, 0226 Be r muda, bm, 0213 B r azil, br, 0218 Bulga r ia, bg, 0207 Canada, ca, 0301 Cayman Islands, ky, 1125 Chile, cl, 0312 China, cn, 0314 Colombia, co, 0315 C r oatia, hr, 0818 Cy pr us, cy, 0325 Czech Re p ublic, cz, 0326 Denma r k, dk, 0411 Dominica, dm, 0413 Dominican Re p ublic, do, 0415 Estonia, ee, 0505 Finland, fi, 0609 F r ance, fr, 0618 Geo r gia, ge, 0705 Ge r many, de, 0405 G r eec e, gr, 0718 G r eenland, gl, 0712 G r enada, gd, 0704 Guyana, gy, 0725 Haiti, ht, 0820 Hong Kong, hk, 0811 Hunga r y, hu, 0821 Iceland, is, 0919 India, in, 0914 Indonesia, id, 0904 I r eland, ie, 0905 Is r ael, il, 0912 Italy, it, 0920 Jamaica, jm , 1013 Ja p an, jp, 1016 Kazakhstan, kz, 1126 Ko r ea, Re p ublic of, kr, 1118 Ky r gyzstan, kg, 1107 Latvia, lv, 1222 Liechtenstein, li, 120 9 Lithuania, lt, 1220 Luxembou r g, l u, 1221 Macedonia, the Fo r mer Yugoslav Re p ublic of, mk, 1311 Malaysia, my, 1325 Malta, mt, 1320 Mexico, m x, 1324 Moldova, Re p ublic of, md, 1304 Monaco, mc, 1303 Montse rr at, ms, 1319 Nethe r lands, nl, 1412 New Zeal and, nz, 1426 No r way, no, 1415 Pakistan, pk, 1611 Pe r u, p e, 160 5 Phili pp ines, ph, 1608 Poland, pl, 1612 Po r tugal, pt, 1620 Pue r to Rico, pr, 1618 Romania, ro, 1815 Russian Fede r ation, ru, 1821 Saint Kitts and Nevis, kn, 1114 Saint Lucia, lc, 1203 Saint Vincent and the G r enadines, vc, 2203 San Ma r ino, sm, 1913 Singa p or e, sg, 1907 Slovakia, sk, 1911 Slovenia, si, 1909 S p ain, es, 0519 Su r iname, sr, 1918 Sweden, se, 1905 Switze r land, ch, 0308 Taiwan, P r ov ince of China, tw, 2023 Tajikistan, tj, 2010 Thailand, th, 2008 T r inidad and Tobago, tt, 2020 Tunisia, tn, 2014 Tu r key, tr, 2018 Tu r kmenistan, tm, 2013 Tu r ks and Caicos Islands, tc, 2003 Uk r aine, ua, 2101 United Kingdom, gb, 0702 United States, us, 2119 U r uguay, uy, 2125 Uzbekistan, uz, 2126 Venezuela, ve, 2205 Vi r gin Islands, B r itish, vg, 220 7 V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 54 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
55 En 08 Chapter 8 Advanced setup Changing the settings Operating the Advanced Setup screen 1 When playback is stopped, display the Home Menu screen. P r ess HO ME MENU. 2 Selec t and set Initial Setup  Advan ced Setup. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Selec t the item and change the setti ng. Use  / / /  to select, then pr ess ENTER .  Closing the Advanced Setup screen P r ess HO ME MENU. Note • Items that cannot be changed a r e indicated in g r ay. The items that can be selected de p end on the p layer ’s status. • In O p tions, the facto r y default sett ings a r e indicated in bold. VIDEO SELECT PLAY MODE HOME MEDIA GALLERY MENU DISPLAY POPUP MENU TOP MENU TOOLS HOME MENU RETURN AUDIO VIDEO SECONDARY OUTPUT RESOLUTION CLEAR ENTER ENTER PLAY PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT  Off  Off  0 Items  Off  Off  9600 bps F ront Key Lock P ower on Start Playlist Playlist Auto Start Playlist Auto Repeat Baud Rate Playback Data Management Setup Navigator P arental Lock Options Advenced Setup Initial Setup BD PLAYER Setting Options Explanatio n Advanced Setu p F r ont Key Lock ALL Select this to lock o pe r ation of the butt ons on the p laye r 's f r ont p anel and o p ening/clos ing of the d isc t r ay. T r ay Select this to only lock o p ening/closing of the disc t r ay. Off Select this if you do n ot want t o lock o p er ation of the butt ons on the p laye r 's f r ont p anel and o p ening/closing of the disc t r ay. Powe r on Sta r t On Sele ct this if you want th e p owe r to tu r n on automaticall y when the p ower co r d is p lugged into a p owe r outlet. Off Select this if you do not wan t the p ower to tur n on automatically when the p ower cor d is p lugged into a p ower outlet . Playlist C r eates a p laylist ( p age 56). Playlist Auto Sta r t On Sel ect this if you want the p lay the p laylist auto matically when the p ower is tu r ned on o r  is pr essed. Off Select this if you do not wan t to p lay the p laylist automatically when the p ower is tur ned on or  is pr essed. V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 55 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
08 56 En Playing titles/chapters in the registered order (Playlist) Registe r titles/cha p te r s on the p layli st and p lay them in the o r der in which they we r e r egister ed. The discs that can be p layed with a p laylist a r e as follows: •D V D s r ecor ded in DV D-Video format •B D s r ecor ded in BDMV format Caution •T o c r eate and p lay the p laylist, use discs cr eate d s p ecifically f o r this p layer , not comme r cially ava ilable discs. When a comme r cially avail able disc is used, the p laye r may not p lay in the o r de r r egiste r ed on the p laylist due to the pr ogr am on the disc. Creating playlist Registe r titles/cha p te r s and c r eate the playl ist. 1 When pla yback is stopped, display the Home Menu screen. P r ess HOME MENU. 2 Select and set Init ial Setup. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Sele ct and set Advanced Setup  Pla ylist  Next Screen. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 4 Select "--- - ---". Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 5 Input the ti tle/chapter you want to register. Use the numbe r button s (0 to 9) o r /  to in p ut the numbe r . Use  / to move th e cu r so r . •T o r egister title 32, chap ter 3, inp ut 0 , 3 , 2 , 0 , 0 and 3 . 6 Register the title/chapter. P r ess ENTER . Th e s p e cified title/ch a p ter is r egister ed on the p laylist. To r egiste r mo r e titles/cha p te r s, r ep eat ste p s 4 to 6. 7 Close the Pl aylist screen. P r ess HO ME MENU. Note • Title numbe r s and cha p ter numbe r s can be changed by selecting al r eady r egister ed titles/cha p ter s. • 000 cannot be r egiste r ed fo r the title numbe r. • When 000 is ente r ed fo r the cha p te r numbe r , all the cha p te r s of the r egiste r ed title a r e r egiste r ed. • A maximu m of 24 titles/cha p ter s can be r egister ed on the p laylist. • All titles/cha p ter s r egister ed on the p laylist a r e deleted when all the p layer 's settings a r e r estor ed to the facto r y defau lts ( p age 51). •D e p ending on the disc and co ntents, titles/chap ter s may not be p layable, even when r egister ed on the p laylist.  Deleting titles/chapters from the playlist Use  /  to select the title/cha p ter to be deleted, then pr ess CLEAR .  Deleting all titles/chapters from the playlist Fi r st pr ess TOOLS , next use  /  to selec t Delete all playlists , then pr ess ENTER . Use  /  to select Yes , then pr ess ENTER . Advanced Setu p Playlist Auto Re p eat On Select this if you want to p lay the p laylist r ep eatedl y. Off Select this if you do not wan t to p lay the p laylist r ep eatedly. Baud Rate 24 00 b p s Set the RS-232C te r minal's s ignal t r ansfer sp ee d to 2 400 b p s. 4800 b p s Set the RS-2 32C te r minal's signal t r an sfe r s p eed to 4 8 00 b p s. 9600 bps Set the RS-2 32C te r minal's signal t r an sfe r s p eed to 9 600 b p s. 19200 b p s Set the RS-2 32C te r minal's signal t r an sfe r s p eed to 19 200 b p s. 115200 b p s Set the RS-2 32C te r minal's signal t r ansfe r s p eed to 115 200 b p s. Setting Options Explanatio n Playlist Title ޓ Chapter 1 --- - --- 0 items 032-0 0 3   Title - Chapter V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 56 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
57 En 08 Playing the playlist Caution •D e p ending on the disc or op er ation, the titles/ cha p te r s may not be p layed as they we r e r egiste r ed on the p laylist. •T h e p laylist cannot be p layed fr om the p lay list scr een. Pe r fo r m the o p er ation b elow to p lay the p laylist. 1 When pla yback is stopped, display the Home Menu screen. P r ess HOME MENU. 2 Select and set Init ial Setup. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 3 Sele ct and set Advanced Setup  Playlist Auto Start  On. Use  / to select, then pr ess ENTER . 4 Close the Initial Setu p screen. P r ess HOME MENU. 5 Play th e playlist. P r ess  PLAY. Playback continues th r ough to the end of the last title/ cha p te r regis te r ed on the p laylist. When t he  / is pr essed du r ing p layback, p layback skip s fr om the cu rr ently p laying title/cha p te r to the pr evious/next title/ cha p te r registe r ed in the p laylist. Note •T h e R e s u m e p layback and Play Mode functions do not wo r k when Playlist Auto Start is set to On . • If you do not want to p lay th e p laylist, set Playlist Auto Start to Off . V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 57 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
09 58 En Chapter 9 Additional information Serial interface specifications In addition to the basic o p er ations on the p layer 's f r ont p anel and r emote contr ol, the p layer is equi pp ed with a se r ial inte r face conf o r ming to RS-232C standa r ds allowing connection to a com p uter . The inte r face is a 9- p in D-Sub connecto r . Caution •T h e 9 - p in con nector uses inch sc r ew thr eads. The D-Sub connecto r 's p in layout is as shown below. Serial control specifications (1) Signal level RS-232C level (2) Data format Data length: 8 bits Sto p bit: 1 bit Pa r ity: None (3) Communication speed (Baud rate) The communication s p eed (Baud r ate) is selectable among the fo llowing: 2400 bps , 4800 bps, 9600 bps , 19200 bps and 115200 b ps . Set to 9600 bps by facto r y default ( p age 56). Connection to a computer The p laye r communicates with the com p ute r using the 9- p in D-Sub conn ecto r 's p ins 2 and 3 fo r signal t r ansfe r and p in 5 as the g r ound. The com p uter an d p layer ar e co nnected as shown on th e diag r am below. The p laye r can acce p t commands wheneve r th e p owe r is on. In addition, th e p layer can acce p t the commands below even when the p owe r is off. •P o w e r ON comm and •P l a y c o m m a n d • Commands with the p ower (A181AFBC), p lay (A181AF39) and p ower on (A181AFBA) Remo te Cont r ol Button commands as a r guments. The r e is no need to connect cont r ol lines othe r than TxD and RxD . Pin no. Terminal Input /Output Function 1D C D I n p ut NC (not connected on the p laye r ) 2R x D I n p ut r ecei ve data 3 TxD Out p ut send da ta 4D T R O u t p ut NC (not connected on the p laye r ) 5 GND -- g r ound 6D S R I n p ut NC (not co nnected on the p laye r ) 7R T S O u t u p t Connected to CTS p in inte r nally. 8C T S I n p ut Co nnected to RTS p in inte r nally. 9R I I n p ut N C (not connected on the p laye r ) 5 1 69 RxD TxD GND BDP-V6000 RxD Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 5 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 5 TxD GND Control terminal such as a computer V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 58 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
59 En 09 Commands and statuses Se r ial inte r face cont r ol is p erfo r med by the com p ute r sending commands, etc., and the p lay e r r etu r ning the status. When command execution is fully com p leted, the p layer r etur ns a com p letion message (R<CR>). If an e rr o r is gene r ated, the p la ye r r etu r ns the e rr o r code (fo r exam p le, E04<CR>). List of usable commands *1 The PL comma nds include b oth the PL comman d without add r ess and the PL command with add r ess. The PL command without add r ess is set to  fo r the r esp ective discs, but how the PL command with addr ess is handled di ffe r s acco r ding to the add r ess mode. *2 Fo r the SE and SP commands, han dling diffe r s acco r ding to the add r ess mode. See Table 2 fo r details. *3 Fo r the SM command , handli ng diffe r s acco r ding to the add r ess mode. See Table 1 fo r de tails. *4 Used to s pecify the add r ess mode s p ecification when using the PL, SE, SP and SM commands. Handling diffe rs acco r ding to the command being used. See Tables 1 and 2 fo r details. No Arguments mnemonics Command name BD DVD CD 1P N P o w e r ON   2P F P o w e r OFF   3O P O p en   4C O C l o s e   59 9 R J S t o p   6A d r ess PL Play  *1  *1  *1 7P A P a u s e   8 ST Still   9S F S t e p For war d   10 SR Ste p Reve r se   11 NS Scan Sto p   12 Ad r ess SE Sea r ch  *2  *2  *2 13 Ad r ess SL Sea r ch & Play  *2  *2  *2 14 Ad r ess SM Sto p Ma r ke r  *3  *3  *3 15 CL Clea r   16 TM Time  *4  *4  *4 17 CH Cha p te r  *4  *4  18 TI Title  *4  *4  19 TR T r ack   *4 20 A r gument KL Key Lock   21 A r gument BS Advanced Playlist Playback   22 ?A Cu rr ent Add r ess Request   23 ?R Title/T r ack Numbe r Request   24 ?C Cha p te r Numbe r Request   25 ?T Time Code Request   26 ?I Index Numbe r Request   27 ?V DVD Disc Status Request   28 ?J BD Disc Status Request   29 ?D Get In fo r mation   30 ?K CD Disc Status Request   31 ?P Playe r Active Mode Request   32 ?L Playe r Model Name Request   33 A r gument SW Slow   34 ?E E rr o r Code Request   35 A r gument MC Menu Call   36 A r gument NB Nume r ic Button   37 A r gument CU Button Select   38 ET Ente r Button   39 ?Z Fi r mwa r e Ve r sion Request   40 /A r gument/ RU Remote Cont r ol Button   No Arguments mnemonics Command name BD DVD CD V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 59 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
09 60 En Table 1 Add r ess modes in which the PL and SM commands a r e valid Table 2 Add r ess modes in which the SE and SL commands a r e valid Command mnemonics Command mnemonics consist of two-digit ASCII al p habetic coded cha r acte r s. U pp e r -case and lowe r -case cha r acte r s can be used without distinction. Arguments (1) A r guments a r e p laced in f r ont of the command. If a command r equir ing an a r gument has no a r gument, an e rro r is gene r ated. (2) A r guments a r e of the fo llowing ty p es: 1. Address: The add r ess consists of ASCII digit cha r acter s fo r the title numbe r , cha p te r numb e r , tr ack numbe r and time code, acco r ding to the add r ess mode. The add r ess mode is dete r mined by the TI, CH, TR and TM commands. If a value g r eater than the maximum value is att r ibuted, th e command will not wo r k no r mally. 2. Argum ent: The a r gument ex pr esses a p ar ameter fo r commands with a r guments othe r than the add r ess (KL, BS, SW, etc.). The a r gument co nsists of AS CII al p habetic coded cha r acte r s and digit cha r acte r s. Communications interface manual Fo r detailed info r mation on the se r ial inte r fa ce commands, download the "BDP-V6000 Commun ications Inte r face Manual" f r om the Pionee r website. BD DVD CD TM(Time)  CH(Cha p te r )  TI(Title)  TR(T r ack)  BD DVD CD TM(Time)  CH(Cha p te r )  TI(Title)  TR(T r ack)  V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 60 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
61 En 09 Licenses The licenses fo r the softwa r e used on this p laye r a r e shown below.  libxml2 The MIT License Co p yr ight © <yea r > < co p yr ight holde r s> Pe r mission is he r eby g r anted, f r ee of cha r ge, to any p er son obtaining a co p y of this softwa r e and associated documentation files (the “Softwa r e”), to deal in the Softwa r e without r est r iction, including without limitation the r ights to use, co p y, modify, me r ge, p ublish, dist r ibute, sublicense, and/o r sell co p ies of the Softwa r e, and to p er mit p er sons to whom the Softwar e is fur nished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above co p yr ight not ice and this p er mission notice shall be included in all c o p ies o r substantial p or tions of the Softwa r e. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LI MITED TO THE WARRANTI ES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DA MAGES OR OTHER LIABI LITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERW ISE, ARISI NG FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE .  OpenSSL The O p enSSL toolkit stays unde r a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the O p enSSL Licen se and the o r iginal SSLeay license a pp ly to th e toolkit. See below fo r the actual lice nse texts. Actu ally both licenses a r e BSD-styl e O p en Sou r ce licenses. In case of any license issues r elated to O p enSSL p lease contact o p enssl- co r e@o p enssl.o r g. OpenSSL License Co p yr ight © 1998-2007 The O p en SSL P r oject. All r ights r eser ved. Redist r ibution and use in sou r ce and bina r y f o r ms, with o r without modification, a r e p er mitte d pr ovided that the following condi tions a r e met: 1. Redist r ibutions of sou r ce code must r etain the above co p yr ight notice, this list of conditions and the following disc laim e r . 2. Redist r ibutions in bina r y fo r m must r e pr odu ce the above co p yr ight notice, this list of conditions and the following disc laim e r in the documentation and/o r othe r mate r ials pr ovided with the dist r ibution. 3. All adve r tising mate r ials mentioning featu r es o r use of this soft wa r e must dis p lay the following acknowledgment: “This pr oduct includes softwa r e develo p ed by the O p enSSL P r oject fo r use in the O p enSSL Toolkit. (htt p ://www.o p enssl.o r g/)” 4. The names “O p enSSL Toolkit” and “O p enSSL P r oject” must not be used to en do r se o r pr omote pr oducts de r ived f r om this s oftwa r e w ithout pr io r w r itten p er mission. For wr itten p er mission, p lease contact o p e nssl-co r e@o p enssl. o r g. 5. P r oducts de r iv ed f r om this softwa r e may not be called “O p enSSL” no r may “O p enSSL” a pp ear in their names without pr io r w r itten p er mission of the O p enSS L P r oject. 6. Redist r ibutions of any fo r m whatsoeve r must r etain the following acknowledgment: “This pr oduct includes softwa r e develo p ed by the O p en SSL P r oject fo r use in the O p enSSL Toolkit (htt p ://www.o p enssl.o r g/)” THIS SO FTWARE IS PRO VIDED BY THE O p enSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSE D OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUD ING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARR ANTIES OF MERCHANTA BILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTI CULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE O p en SSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCI DENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM AGES (INCLUDING , BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIA BILITY, OR TORT (INCL UDING NEGLI GENCE O R OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DA MAGE. This pr oduct i ncludes c r yp togr ap hi c softwa r e w r itten by E r ic Young (eay@c ry p tsoft.com).Thi s pr oduct includ es softwa r e w r itten by Tim Hudson (tjh@c r yp tsoft.com). Original SSLeay License Co p yr ight © 1995-1998 E r ic Young (eay@c r yp tsoft.com) All r ights r ese r ved. This p ackage is an SSL im p le ment atio n w r it ten by E r ic Young ( eay@c r yp tsoft.com). The im p lementation was w r itten so as to co nfo r m with Netsca p es SSL. This lib r ar y is f r ee fo r comme r cial and non-comme r cial use as long as the following conditions a r e ahe a r ed to. The following conditions a pp ly to all code found in this dist r ib ut io n , b e i t t h e R C4 , RS A, lh a sh , D E S, et c. , co de ; no t just the SSL code. The SSL docu mentation inclu ded with this dis t r ibuti on is c ove r ed by the s ame co p yr ight te r ms ex ce p t that the holde r is Tim Hudson (tjh@c r yp tsoft.com). Co p yr ight r em ains Er ic Young’s, an d as such any Cop y r ight notices in the code a r e not to be r emoved. If this p ackage is used in a pr oduc t, E r ic Young should be given att r ibution as the autho r of the p ar ts of the lib r ar y us ed. This c an be in the fo r m of a textual message at pr og r am sta r tu p o r in documentati on (online o r textual) pr ovided with the p ackage. Redist r ibution a nd use in sou r ce and bina r y fo r ms, with o r without mo dification, a r e p er mit ted pr ov ided that the following conditions a r e met: 1. Redist r ibutions of sou r ce code must r etain the co p yr igh t no tice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r . 2. Redist r ibutions in bina r y fo r m must r e pr oduce the above co p yr ight notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaime r in the documentation and/o r othe r mate r ials pr ovided with the dist r ibution. 3. All adve r tising mate r ials me ntioning featu r es o r use of this softwa r e must dis p lay the following acknowledgement: “This pr oduct includes c r yp togr ap hic softwa r e w r itten by E r ic Young (eay@c r yp tsoft.com)” The wo r d ‘c r yp togr ap hic’ can be le ft out i f the r ouines f r om the lib ra r y being use d a r e not c r yp tog r ap hic r elat ed :-). 4 . If you i nclude a ny Windo ws s p ecific code (o r a de r iv ativ e the r eof) f r om the a pp s di r ecto r y (a pp lication code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This pr oduct includes softwa r e w r itten by Tim Hudson (tjh@c r yp tsoft.com )” THIS SOFTWARE IS P ROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPL IED WARRANTIES O F MERCHANTABILITY AN D FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIREC T, INDIRECT, INCIDEN TAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDI NG, BUT NOT LI MI TED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABIL ITY, OR TOR T (INCLUDI NG NEGLIG ENCE OR OTHERW ISE) AR ISING IN ANY W AY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The lice nce and dist r ibution te r ms fo r any p ublically avail able v e r sion o r de r ivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. thi s code cannot si m p ly be co p ied and p ut unde r anothe r dist r ibution lice nce [includi ng the GNU Public Licence.]  zlib This softwa r e is based in p ar t on zlib see htt p ://www.zlib.net fo r info r mation.  FreeType2 The FreeType Project L ICENSE 2006-Jan-27 Co p yr ight 1996-200 2, 2006 by David Tu r ner , Robe r t Wilhelm, and We r ne r Lembe r g Int r oduction The F r eeTyp e P r oject is dis t r ibuted in seve r al a r chi ve p ackages; some of them may co ntain, in addition to the F r eeTy p e font engine , va r ious tools and cont r ibutions which r ely on, or r elate to, the Fr ee Ty p e P r oject. This license a pp lies to all file s found in such p ackages, and which do not fall unde r thei r own ex p licit license. The license affects thus the F r eeTy p e font engine, the test pr og r ams, documentation and makefiles, at the ver y least. This license was ins p ir ed by the BSD, A r tisti c, and IJG (Inde p endent JPEG G r oup ) licenses, which all encou r age inclusion and use of f r ee sof twa r e in co mme r cial and f r eewa r e pr oducts alik e. As a cons equence, its main p oints a r e that: •W e d o n ’ t pr omise that this softwa r e wo r ks. Howeve r , we will be inte r ested in any kind of bug r ep or ts.(‘as is’ dist r ibution) •Y o u c a n u s e t h i s s o f t w a r e for whatever you want , in p ar ts o r full fo r m, without having to p ay u s.(‘ r oyalty-f r ee’ usage) •Y o u m a y n o t pr etend that y ou w r ote this so ftwa r e. If you use it, o r only p ar ts of it, in a pr og r am, yo u must acknowledge somewhe r e in you r documentation that you have us ed the F r eeTyp e code.( ‘c r edits’) We s p ecifically p er mit and encou r age the inclusion of this softwa r e, with o r withou t modifications, in comme r cial pr oducts. We disclaim all wa rr anties cove r ing The Fr eeTyp e P r oject and assume no liability r ela ted to Th e F r eeTy p e P r oject. Finally, m any p eop le asked us fo r a pr efe rr ed fo r m fo r a c r edit/disclaime r to use in com p liance with this license. We thus enc ou r age you to use the follo wing text: Po r tions of this softwa r e a r e co p yr ight © <yea r > The F r eeTy p e P r oje ct (www.f r eety p e.o r g). All r ights r ese r ved. Please r ep lace <yea r > with the value f r om the F r eeTy p e ve r sion you actually use. Le gal Te r ms 0. Definitions Th r oughout this license, the te r ms ‘ p ackage’, ‘F r eeTy p e P r oject’, and ‘F r ee Ty p e a r chive’ r efe r to the set of files o r iginally dist r ibuted by the autho r s (David Tu r ne r , Robe r t Wilhelm, and We r ne r Lembe r g) as the ‘F r eeTy p e P r oject’, be they nam ed as al p ha, bet a o r fina l r elease. ‘You’ r efe r s to the licensee, o r p er son us ing the pr oj ect, whe r e ‘using’ is a gene r ic te r m including com p iling the pr oject’s sou r ce code as well as linking it to for m a ‘ pr og r am’ o r ‘executable’. This pr og r am is r ef e rr ed to a s ‘a pr og r am using the F r eeTyp e engine’. This license a pp l ies to all files dist r ibuted in the o r igin al F r eeTy p e P r oject, including all sou r ce code, bina r ies and documenta tion, unless oth e r wise stated in t he fil e in it s o r iginal, unmodified fo r m a s dist r ibuted in the o r iginal a r chive. I f you a r e unsu r e wh ethe r or not a p ar ticular file is cove r ed by this license, you must contact us to ve r ify this. The F r eeTyp e P r oject is co p yr ight (C) 1996-2000 by David Tu r ne r , Robe r t Wilhelm, an d We r ne r Lembe r g. All r ights r eser ved excep t as s p ecified below. 1. No Wa rr an ty TH E FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED ‘AS IS’ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES O F MERCHANT ABILITY AND F ITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAG ES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT. 2. Redist r ibution This license g r ants a wo r ldwide, r oyalty-fr ee, p e rp etual and i rr evocable r i ght and license t o use, execu te, p er for m, comp ile, disp lay, cop y, cr eate der ivative wor ks of, dist r ibute and sublicense the F r eeTyp e P r oje ct (in both so u r ce and object code fo r ms) and der ivative wor ks the r eof fo r any p u rp ose; and to autho r ize othe r s to exe r cise some o r all of the r ights gr anted her ein, subject to the following conditions: •R e d i s t r ibu tion of sour ce c ode must r etain this licens e file (‘FTL.TX T’) unalte r ed; any additions, deletions o r c han ges to the o r iginal files must be clea r ly indicated in accom p anying docu mentation. T he co p yr ight notices of th e unalte r ed, o r iginal files must be pr ese r ved in all cop ies of sour ce files. •R e d i s t r ibu tion in binar y for m must pr ovide a disclaime r that states that the softwa r e is based in p ar t of the wo r k of the Fr ee Typ e Team , in the dist r ibution document ation. We also enc ou r age you to p ut an UR L to the F r eeTyp e web p age in you r documentation, though this isn’t mandato r y. These conditions a pp ly to any softwa r e de r ived f r om o r based on t he F r eeTy p e P r oject, not ju st the unmod ified files. If y ou use ou r wo r k, you must acknowledge us. Howeve r , no fee need be p aid to us. 3. Adve r tising Neithe r th e F r eeTyp e aut ho r s and cont r ibutors no r you shall use th e name of the othe r fo r comme r cial, adve r tising, o r pr omotional p u rp oses witho ut s p ecific pr io r wr itten p e r mission. We suggest, but do not r equir e, that you use one o r mo r e of the following p hr ases to r efer to this softwa r e in you r document ation o r adve r tising mater ials: ‘Fr eeTyp e P r oject’, ‘F r eeTy p e Engine’, ‘F r eeTy p e lib ra r y’, o r ‘F r eeTy p e Dist r ibution’. A s y ou have not signed t his license, you a r e not r equir ed to acce p t it. Howeve r , a s the F r eeTyp e P r oject is co p yr ighted mate r ial, only this license, o r an othe r one cont r acted with th e autho r s, g r ants you the r ight t o use, dist r ibute, and modify it. The r efo r e, by usin g, dist r ibuting, o r modifying the F r eeTy p e P r oj ect, you indic ate that you und e r stand and acce p t all the te r ms of this license. 4. Contacts The r e a r e two mailing lists r elated to F r eeTy p e: •f r eetyp e@nongnu.or g Discusses gene r al use and a pp lications of Fr eeTyp e, as well as futu r e and wanted additions to the lib r ar y and dist r i bution. If you a r e lo oking fo r su pp o r t, sta r t in this list if you hav en’t found a nything to hel p you in t he document ation. •f r eetyp e-devel@nong nu.or g Discusses bugs, as well as engine inte r nals, design issues, s p ecific licenses, p or ting, etc. Ou r home p age can be found at htt p ://www.f r eety p e.o r g V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 61 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
09 62 En  libpng COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and L ICENSE: If you modify lib p ng you may inse r t additional notices immediately following this sentence. lib p ng ve r sions 1.2.6, August 1 5, 2004, th r ough 1.2.26, A pr il 2, 2008, a r e Cop yr ight © 2004, 2006-20 08 Glenn Rande r s- Peh r son, and a r e dist r ibuted acco r ding to the same disc laim e r and license as lib p ng-1 .2.5 with the following individual added to the list of Cont r ibuting Autho r s Cosmin T r uta lib p ng ve r sions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, th r ough 1. 2.5 - Octo be r 3, 2002, a r e Cop yr ight © 2000-2 002 Glenn Ran de r s- Peh r son, and a r e dist r ibuted acco r ding to the same disc laim e r and license as lib p ng-1 .0.6 with the following individuals added to th e list of Cont r ibuting Autho r s Simon-Pie rr e Cadieux E r ic S. Raymond Gilles Vollant and with the following additions to the disclaime r : The r e is no wa rr anty against inte r fe r en ce with y ou r enjoy ment of the lib r ar y o r against inf r ingement. The r e is no wa rr anty that ou r effo r ts o r the lib r ar y will fulfill any of you r p ar ticular p u rp oses o r needs. This li b r ar y is pr ovided with all faults, and the enti r e r isk of satisfacto r y quality, p er for mance, acc ur acy, and effor t is with the us e r . lib p ng ve r sions 0.97, Janua r y 1998, t h r ough 1.0.6, Ma r ch 20, 2000, a re Co p yr ight © 1998 , 1999 Glenn Rande r s- Peh r son, and a r e dist r ibuted acco r ding to the same disc laim e r and license as lib p ng -0.96, with the following indiv idu als added to the list o f Cont r ibuting Autho r s: Tom Lane Glenn Rand e r s-Pehr son Willem van Schaik lib p ng ve r sions 0.89, June 1996, th r ough 0. 96, May 199 7, a r e Co py r ight © 1996, 1997 And r eas Dilger Distr ibuted acco r ding to the same disclaime r and license as lib p ng- 0.88, with the following individu als added to the list of Cont r ibuting Autho r s: John Bowle r Kevin B r acey Sam Bushell Magnus Holmg r en G r eg Roelof s Tom Tanne r lib p ng ve r sions 0.5, May 1995, th r ough 0.88, Ja nua r y 1996, a r e Co py r ight © 1995, 1996 Guy E r ic Schalnat, Gr oup 42, Inc. Fo r the p u rp oses of this co p yr ight and license, “Cont r ibuting Autho r s” is defined as the following set of individuals: And r eas Dilge r Dav e Ma r tindale Gu y E r ic Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegne r The PNG Ref e r ence Lib r ar y is su pp lied “AS IS”. The Cont r ibuting Autho r s and G r oup 42, Inc. disclaim all wa rr anties, ex pr essed o r imp lied, including, with out limitation, the wa rr anties of me r chantability and of fitness fo r any p u rp ose. The Cont r ibuting Au tho r s and G r ou p 42, Inc. assume no liability fo r di r ect, indi r ect, incidental, s p ecial, exem p la r y, o r consequent ial damages, wh ich may r esult fr om the use of the PNG Refer ence Lib r ar y, even if advise d of the p ossibility of such damage. Pe r mission is he r eby g r ante d to use, cop y, modify, and dist r ibute this sou r ce code , o r p or tio ns he r eof , fo r any p u rp ose, withou t fee, subject to th e following r estr ictions: 1. The o r igin of this sou r ce code must not be mis r e pr esented. 2. Alte r ed ve r sions must be p lainly m a r ked as such and must not be mis r e pr esent ed as be ing the o r iginal sou r ce. 3. This Co p yr ight not ice may not b e r emoved o r alte r ed f r om any sou r ce o r alte r ed sou r ce dist r ibution. The Cont r ibuting Autho r s and G r oup 42, In c. s p ecifically p er mit, withou t fee, and en cour age the use of this sour ce code as a com p onent to su pp o r ting the PNG file fo r mat in comme r cial pr oduct s. If you use this sou r ce code in a pr oduct, acknowledgment is not r equir ed but would be a ppr eciated. A “ p ng_get_cop yr ight” function is availabl e, fo r convenient use in “about” boxes and th e like: pr intf( “%s” , p ng_get_cop yr ig ht(NULL));Also, the PNG logo (in PNG fo r mat, of cou r se) is su pp lied in the files “ p ngba r. p ng” and “ p ngba r .j p g (88x31 ) and “ p ngnow.p ng” (98x31). Lib p ng is OSI Ce r tified O p en So u r ce Softwa r e. OSI Ce r tified O p en Sou r ce is a ce r tification ma r k of the O p en Sou r ce Initiative. Glenn Rand e r s-Pehr son glenn rp at use r s.sou r cefo r ge.net 2-A pr -08  libjpg The Inde p endent J PEG G r oup ’s JPEG s oftwa r e README fo r r elease 6b o f 27-Ma r -1998 This dist r ibuti on contains the sixth p ublic r elease of th e Inde p endent JPEG G r ou p ’s f r ee JPEG s oftwa r e. You a r e welcome to r edistr ibute this softwa r e and to use it fo r any p u rp ose, subject t o the conditions unde r LEGAL ISSUES, below. Se r ious use r s of this softwa r e ( p ar ticu la r ly those inco rp o r ating it into la r ge r pr og r ams) should contact IJG at j p eg-info@uune t.uu.net to be added to ou r el ect r onic mailing list. Mailing list membe r s a r e notified of u p dates and have a chance to p ar ticip ate in technical discussi ons, etc. This softwa r e is the wo r k of To m Lane, Phili p Glads tone, Jim Bouche r , Lee C r ocke r , Julian Minguillon, L uis O r tiz, Geo r ge Philli p s, Davide Rossi, Guido Vollbeding, Ge’ Weije r s, and othe r membe r s of the Inde p en dent JPE G G rou p . IJG is not affiliated with the official ISO JPEG standa r ds committe e. DOCUMENTATION ROADMAP This file contains the following sections: OVERVIEW Gene r al de sc r ip tion of JPEG and the IJG softwa r e. LEGAL ISSUES Co p yr ight, lack of wa rr anty , te r ms of dist r ibution. REFERENCES Whe r e t o lea r n mo r e about JPEG. ARCHIVE LOCATIONS Whe r e to find newe r ve r sions of this softwa r e. RELATED SOFTWARE Othe r stuff you should get. FILE FORMAT WA RS So ftwa r e *not* to get. TO DO Plans fo r futu r e IJG r eleases. Othe r documentation files in the dist r ibutio n a r e: Use r documentation: install.doc How to configu r e and install the IJG softwa r e. u sage .doc Usage inst r uctions fo r cj p eg, dj p eg, j p egt r an, r dj p gcom, and w rj p gcom. *.1 Unix-style man p ages fo r pr ogr ams (same info as usage.doc). wiza r d.doc Advanced usage inst r uctions f o r JPEG wiza r ds only. change.log Ve r sion-to-ve r sion change hi ghlights. P r og r amme r and inte r nal documentati on: libj p eg.doc How to use th e JPEG lib r ar y in you r own pr og r ams. exam p le.c Sam p le code fo r calling the JPEG lib r ar y. st r uctu r e.doc Ove r view of the JPEG lib r ar y’s inte r nal st r uctu r e. filelist.doc Road ma p of IJ G files . code r ules.doc Coding style r ules --- p lease r ead if you cont r ibute code. Please r ead at least the files install.do c and usage.doc. Useful info r mation can also be found in the JPEG FAQ (F r equent ly Asked Qu estions ) a r ticle. See ARCHIV E LOCATIONS below to f ind out w he r e to obtain the FAQ a r ticle. If you wa nt to unde r stand how the JPEG code wo r ks, we suggest r eading one o r mo r e of the REFERENCES, then looking at the documentation files (in r oughly th e o r der listed) befo r e diving into the code. OVERVIEW This p ackage contains C softwa r e to im p lement JPEG image com pr ession and decom pr ession. JPEG ( pr onounced “jay- p eg”) is a standa r dized com pr ession method fo r full-colo r and g r ay-scale images. JPEG is intended fo r com pr essing r ea l-wor ld scenes; line dr awings, ca r toons and othe r non- r ealistic images a r e not its st r ong su it. JPEG is lossy, meaning that the out p ut image is not exactly identical to th e in p ut image. Henc e you must not use JPEG if yo u have to have ide ntical out p ut bits. However , on ty p ical p hotog r ap hic i mages, ve r y good com pr ession levels can be obtained with no visible chan ge, and r emar kably high com pr ession levels a r e p ossibl e if you can tole r ate a low-quality image. Fo r mo r e details, see the r efer ences, or just ex p er iment with var ious com pr ession settings. This softwa r e im p lements JPEG baseline, extended- sequential, and pr og r essive com pr ession pr ocesses. P r ovision is made fo r su ppo r ting all va r iants of these pr ocesses, althou gh some uncommon p a r amete r settings a r en’t im p lemen ted yet. Fo r legal r easons, we a r e not dist r ibut ing code fo r the a r ithmetic-coding va r iants of JPEG; see LE GAL ISSUE S. We have made n o pr ovision fo r su pp o r ting the hie ra r chical o r lossless pr oces ses defined in the standa r d. We pr ovide a set of lib r ar y r outines fo r r eading and w r iting JPEG image files, p lus two sam p le a pp lications “cj p eg” and “dj p eg”, whic h use the lib r ar y to p er fo r m conve r sion between JPEG a nd some othe r p op ular image file fo r mats. The lib r ar y is intended to be r eused in othe r a pp lications. In o r der to su pp o r t file conve r sion an d viewing softwa r e, we have includ ed conside r able functionality beyond the ba r e JPEG coding/decoding c a p ability; fo r exam p le, the colo r quantization modules a r e not st r ictly p ar t of JPEG decoding, but they a r e ess ential fo r out p ut to colo r ma pp ed file fo r mats o r colo r ma pp ed disp lays. These ext r a functions can be co m p iled out of th e libr ar y if not r equir ed fo r a p ar ticular a pp lication. We have also i ncluded j p egt r an, a utility fo r lossless t r anscoding between diffe r ent JPEG pr ocesses, and “ r djp gcom” and “w r jp gcom”, two sim p le a pp lications fo r inse r ting a nd ext r acting textual comme nts in JFI F file s. The em p hasis in designing this softwa r e has b een on achieving p or tability and flexibility, while also making it fast enough to be u seful. In p ar tic ula r , the softwa r e is not intended to be r ead as a tuto r ial on JPEG. (S ee the REFEREN CES secti on fo r int r oductor y mate r ial.) Rathe r , it is int ende d to b e r eliable, p or table, indust r ial-str ength code. We do not claim to have achieved that goal in eve r y as p ect of the softwa r e, but we s t r ive fo r it. We welcome the use of this softwa r e as a comp onent of comme r cial pr oducts. No r oyalty is r equir ed, but we do ask fo r an acknowledgement in pr oduct docum entation, as desc r ibed unde r LEGAL ISSUES. LEGAL ISSUES In p lain English: 1. We don ’t pr omise that this softwa r e wo r ks. (But if you find any bugs, p lease le t u s know!) 2. You can use t his softwa r e fo r whateve r you want. Yo u don’t have to p ay us. 3. You may no t pr etend that you w r ote this s oftwa r e. If you use it in a pr og r am, you must acknowledge somewher e in you r documenta tion that you’ve us ed the IJ G code. In lega lese: The autho r s make NO WARRANTY o r r e pr esentatio n, eithe r ex pr ess o r im p lied, with r es p ect to this sof twa r e, its quality, accu r acy, me r c hantability, o r fitness fo r a pa r ticula r p u rp ose. This softwa r e is pr ovided “AS IS”, and you, its use r , assume the enti r e r isk as to its quality and accu r acy. This sof twa r e is co p yr ight © 1991-1998 , Thomas G. Lane. All Rights Res e r ved exc e p t as s p ecified below. Pe r mi ssion is he r eby g r anted to use, co p y, modify, and dist r ibute this softwa r e (o r p or tions the r eof) fo r any p u rp ose, without fee, subject to th ese conditions: (1)If any p ar t of the sou r ce code fo r this softwa r e is dist r ibuted, then this README file m ust be included, with this co p yr ig ht and no-wa rr anty notic e unalte r ed; and any additions, deletions, o r changes to the o r iginal files must be clea r ly indicated in accom p anying document ation. (2)If only executable code is dist r ibuted, then the accom p anying documentation must state t hat “this softwa r e is based in p ar t on the wo r k of the Inde p endent JPEG G r oup ”. (3)Pe r mission fo r use of this softw a r e is g r anted only if the use r accep ts full r es p onsibility fo r an y u ndesi r able consequenc es; the autho r s accep t NO LIAB ILITY fo r damages of any kind. These conditions a pp ly to any softwa r e de r ived f r om o r based on the IJG code, not just t o the unmodified lib r ar y. If you use ou r wo r k, y ou ought to acknowledge us. Pe r mission is NOT g r anted fo r th e use of any IJG autho r ’s name o r com p any name in adve r tising o r p ublici ty r el ating to this softwa r e o r pr oducts de r ived f r om it. This softwa r e may be r efe rr ed to on ly as “the Inde p endent JPEG G r oup ’s softwa r e”. We s p ecifically p er mit and encou r age the us e of this softwa r e as the basis of comme r cial pr oduct s, pr ovided that all wa rr an ty o r liability claims a r e assumed by the pr oduct vendo r . ansi2kn r .c is included in this d ist r ibution by p er mission of L. Pete r Deutsch, sole pr opr ieto r of its co p yr ight holde r , Aladdin Ente rpr ises of Menlo Pa r k, CA. ansi2knr .c is NOT cove r ed by the above co p yr ight and conditions, but instead by the us ual dis t r ibution te r ms of t he F r ee Softwa r e Foundation; pr inci p ally, that you must include sou r ce code if you r edistr ibute it. ( See the file ansi2kn r .c for full details.) Howeve r , since ansi2kn r .c is not ne eded as p ar t of any pr og r am gener ated fr om th e IJG code, this does not limit you mo r e than the fo r egoing p ar agr ap hs do. The U nix configu r ation sc r ip t “configu r e” was pr oduced with GNU Autocon f. It is co p yr ight by the F r ee Softwa r e Foundation but is f r eely dis t r ibutable. The same holds fo r its su pp o r ting sc ri p ts (config.guess, config.sub, ltconfig, ltmain.sh). Anothe r su pp o r t sc ri p t, install-sh, is co py r ight by M.I.T. but is also f r eely dist r ibutable. It a pp ea r s that the a r ithmetic coding o p tion of the JP EG s p ec is cov e r ed by p atents owned by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi. He nce a r ithm etic coding cannot legally be used without obtaining one o r mo r e licenses. Fo r this r eason, su pp or t fo r ar ithmetic coding has been r emoved f r om the f r ee JPEG softwa r e. (Sin ce a r ithmetic coding pr ovides only a ma r ginal gain over the unp atented Huffman mode, it is unlikely that ve r y many im p lementations will su pp o r t it.) So fa r as we a r e awa r e, the r e a r e no p atent r estr ictions on the r emainin g code. The IJG dist r ibuti on fo r mer ly included code to r ead and w r ite GIF files. To avoid entanglement with the Unisys LZW p atent, GIF r eading su pp or t has been r emoved altogether , and the GIF w r iter has been sim p lified to pr oduce uncom pr esse d GIFs. This technique does not use th e LZW algo r ithm; the r esulti ng GIF files a r e la r ge r than usual, but a r e r eadable by all s tanda r d GIF decode r s. We a r e r equir e d to state that V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 62 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
63 En 09 “The G r ap hics Inte r change Fo r mat(c) is th e Co p yr ight pr o pe r ty of Com p uSe r ve In co rp o r ated. GIF(sm) is a Se r vice Ma r k pr o pe r ty of Com p uSe r ve Inco rpo r ated.” REFERENCES We highly r ecommend r eadi ng one o r mo r e of these r efer ences be for e tr ying to under stand the in nar ds of the JPEG softwa r e. The best sho r t technical int r oduction to the JP EG com pr ession algo r ithm is Wallace, G r egor y K. “The JPEG Still Pictu r e C om pr ession Standa r d”, Communication s of the ACM, A pr il 1991 (vol. 34 no. 4), pp . 30-44. (Adjacent a r ticles in that issue discuss MPEG motion p ic tu r e com pr essi on, a pp lications of JPEG, and r elated to p ics.) If you don ’t have the CACM issu e handy, a PostSc r ip t file co ntaining a r evised ve r sion of Wallace’s a r ticle is available at ft p ://ft p .u u.net/g r ap hics /j p eg/ wallace. p s.gz. The file (actually a pr e pr int fo r an a r ticle that a pp ea r ed in IEEE T r ans. Consume r Elect r onics) omits the sam p le images that a pp ea r ed in CACM , but it include s co rr ections and some adde d mate r ial. Note: the Wallace a r ticle is co py r ight ACM and IEEE, and it may not be used fo r comme r cial p u rp oses. A somewhat less technical, mo r e leis u r ely in t r oduction to JPEG can be found in The Data Com pr ession Book by Ma r k Nelson and Jean-lou p Gailly, p ublished by M&T Books (Ne w Yo r k), 2nd ed. 199 6, ISBN 1-55851-434-1. Th is book pr ovi des good ex p lanations and exam p le C code fo r a multitude of com pr ession methods including JPEG. It is an excellent sou r ce if you a r e com fo r table r eading C code but don’t know much about data com pr ession in gene r al. The book’s JPEG sam p l e c o d e i s f a r f r om indust r ial-st r ength, but when you a r e r eady to look at a full im p lementation, you’ve got one he r e... The best full desc r ip tion of JPEG is the textbook “JPEG Still Image Data Com pr ession S tanda r d” by William B. Pennebake r and Joan L. Mitchell, p ublished by Van Nost r and Reinhold, 1993, ISBN 0 -442-01272-1 . P r ice US$59.95, 638 pp . The bo ok include s the com p lete te xt of the ISO JPEG standa r ds (DIS 10918-1 and d r aft DIS 109 18- 2). This is by fa r the most com p lete ex p osition of J PEG in existence, and w e highly r ecommend it. The JPEG standa r d itself is not available elec t r onically ; you must o r der a p ap er co p y t h r ou gh ISO o r ITU. (Unless you feel a need to own a ce r tified o fficial co p y, we r ecommend buying the Pe nnebake r and Mitchell book instead; it’s much chea p er and includes a gr eat deal of useful ex p lanato r y mate r ial.) In the USA, co p ies of the standa r d may be o r der ed f r om ANSI Sales at (212) 642-4900, o r fr om Global Enginee r ing Documents at (800) 854-7179. (ANSI doesn’t take c r edit ca r d o r der s, but G lobal does.) It’s not chea p : as of 1992, ANSI was cha r ging $95 for Par t 1 and $4 7 fo r Pa r t 2, p lus 7% shi pp ing/han dling. The standa r d is divided into two p ar ts, Pa r t 1 being the actual s p ecification, while Pa r t 2 cove r s com p liance testing methods. Pa r t 1 is titled “Digital Com pr e ss ion and Coding of Continuous -tone Still Images, Pa r t 1: Requi r ements and guidelines” and has document numbe r s ISO/IEC IS 10918-1, ITU-T T. 81. Pa r t 2 is titled “Digital Com pr ession and Cod ing of Continuo us-tone Still Images, Pa r t 2: Com p liance testing” and has document numbe r s I SO/IEC IS 10918-2, ITU-T T. 83. Some exte nsions to t he o r iginal JPEG standa r d a r e defined in JPEG Pa r t 3, a newe r ISO standa r d numbe red ISO/IEC IS 10918-3 and ITU -T T.84. IJG cu rr ently does not su pp o r t any Pa r t 3 extensions. The JPEG standa r d does not s p ecify all details of an inte r changeable file fo r mat. Fo r the omitted details we follow the “JFIF” conve ntions, r evision 1.02. A co p y of the JFIF s p ec is available f r om: Lite r atu r e De p ar tment C-Cub e Mic r osyst ems, Inc. 1778 McCa r thy Blvd . Mil p itas, CA 95035 p hone (4 08) 944-63 00, fax (4 08) 944 -6314 A PostSc r ip t ve r sion of this document is available by FTP at ft p ://ft p . uu.net/g r ap hic s/j p eg/jfif. p s.gz. T he r e is also a p lain text ve r sion at ft p ://ftp .uu.ne t/gr ap hics /jp eg/jfif.txt.gz, but it is missing the figu r es. The TIFF 6.0 file fo r mat s pecificat ion can be obtained by FTP f r om ft p ://ft p .sgi.com/g r ap hics/tif f/TIFF6. p s.gz. The JPEG inco rp o r ation scheme f ound in the TIFF 6.0 s p ec of 3-June- 92 has a numbe r of se r ious pr oblem s. IJG does not r ecommen d use of the TIF F 6.0 desig n (TIFF Com pr ession tag 6). Instead, we r ecommend the J PEG design pr o p osed by TIFF Techni cal Note #2 (Co m pr ession tag 7). Co p ies of this Note can be obtained f r om f t p .sgi.co m o r f r om ft p :// ft p .uu.net/g r ap hics/j p eg/. It is ex p ected that the next r ev ision of the TIFF s p ec will r ep lace the 6.0 JPEG design with the Note’s design. Althou gh IJG’s own code does not su pp o r t TIFF/JPEG, the f r ee libtiff lib r ar y uses ou r lib r ar y to im p lement TIFF/JPEG p er the Note. libtiff is available f r om ft p ://ft p .sgi.co m/g r ap hics/tiff/. ARCHIVE LOCATIONS The “o ffic ial” a r chive site fo r this softwa r e is ft p .uu.net (Inte r net ad d r ess 192.48.96.9) . The most r ecent r eleased ve r sion can always be found the r e in di r ec to r y g r ap hics/ j p eg. This pa r ticula r ve r sion will be a r chived as ft p :// ft p .uu.net/g r ap hics/j p eg/jp egsr c. v6b.ta r .gz. If you don’t have di r ect Inte r net access, UUNET’s a r ch ives a r e also available via UUCP; contact he l p @uunet.uu. net fo r info r mation on r et r ieving files that way. Nume r ous Inte r net sites maintain co p ies of the UUNET files. Howeve r , only ft p .uu.net is gua r anteed to have the latest official ve r sion. You can also obtain this softwa r e in DOS-com p atible “zi p ” a r chive fo r mat f r om the Sim Tel a r chive s (ft p :// ft p .simtel.net/ p ub /simteln et/msd os/g r ap hic s/), o r on Com p uSe r ve in the G r ap hics Su pp o r t fo r um (GO CIS:GR APHSUP), lib r ar y 12 J PEG Tools. Again, t hese ve r sions may sometimes lag behind the ft p .u u.net r elease. The JPEG FAQ (F r eq uently Asked Questi ons) a r tic le is a useful sou r ce of gene r al info r mation about JPEG. It is u p dated constantly and the r efo r e is not included in this dist r ibution. T he FAQ is p osted eve r y two weeks to Usen et newsg r ou p s com p .g r ap hics.misc, n ews.answe r s, an d othe r g r ou p s. It is available on the Wo r ld Wide Web at ht t p :/ /www.faqs. o r g/faqs/j p eg-faq/ and othe r news.a nswe r s a r chive sites, including the official news.answe r s a r chive at r tfm.mit.e du: ftp ://r tfm.mit.edu / p ub/usenet/ news.answ e r s/ j p eg-faq/. If you don’t ha ve Web o r FTP access, send e -mail to mail -se r ver @r tfm.mit.edu with bo dy send us enet/new s.answe r s/jp eg-faq/p ar t1 send us enet/new s.answe r s/jp eg-faq/p ar t2 REL AT ED SOFTWARE Nume r ous viewing and image mani p ulation pr ogr am s now su pp o r t JPEG. (Qui te a few of them use this lib r ar y to do so.) The JPEG FAQ desc ribed above lists some of the mo r e p op ular fr ee and shar ewar e viewer s, a nd tells wher e to obtain them on Inte r net. If you a r e on a Unix machine, we highly r ecommend Jef Poskanze r ’s f r ee PBM PLUS softw a r e, which pr ovides many useful o p er ations on PPM-fo r mat image files. In p ar ticular , it can co nve r t PPM images to and f r om a w ide r ange of othe r fo r mats, thus making cj p eg/dj p eg con side r ably m o r e useful. The latest ve r sion is distr ibuted by the NetPBM g r ou p , and is av aila ble f r om nume r ous sites, notably ft p :// wua r chive.wustl.edu/g r ap hics/g r ap hics/ p ackages/ NetPBM/. Unfo r tunately PBMPLUS/NETPBM is not nea r ly as p or table as the IJG softwa r e is; you a r e likely to have difficulty making it wo rk on any non-Unix machine. A diffe r ent fr ee JPEG imp lementation, wr itten by the PV RG g r ou p at Stanfo r d, is available f r om ft p :/ / havefun.stanfo r d.edu/p ub/jp eg/. T his pr og r am is designed fo r r esea r ch and ex p er im entation r athe r than pr oduct ion use; it is slowe r , ha r der to u se, and less p or table tha n the IJG code, but it is easie r to r ead and modify. Also, the PVRG code su pp o r ts lossless JPEG, whic h we do not. (On the othe r hand, it doesn’t d o pr og r essive JPEG.) FILE FORMAT WARS Some JPEG pr og r ams pr oduce files that a r e no t comp atible with o u r lib r ar y. The r oot of the pr oblem is that the ISO JPEG committe e failed to s p ecify a co nc r ete file fo r mat. Some vendo r s “fi lled in the blanks” on thei r own, c r eating pr opr ieta r y for mats t hat no on e else co uld r ead. (Fo r exam p le, none of the ea r ly comme r cial JPEG im p lementations f o r the Macintosh wer e able to exchange com pr essed files.) The file fo r mat we have ado p ted is called JFIF (see REFERENCES). This fo r mat has been ag r eed to by a numbe r of majo r comme r cial JPEG vendo r s, and it has become the d e facto standa r d. JFIF is a minimal o r “lo w end” r e pr esenta tion. We r ecommend the use of TIFF /JPEG (TIFF r evision 6.0 as modified by TIFF Technic al Note #2) f o r “high end” a pp lications that need to r ecor d a lot of additional data about an image. TIFF/JPEG is fai r ly new and not yet widel y su pp o r ted, unfo r tunately. The u p coming JPEG Pa r t 3 standa r d defines a file fo r mat called SP IFF. SPI FF is inte r op e r able with JFIF, in the sense that most JFIF decode r s should be able to r ead the most common va r iant of SP IFF. SPIFF has some technical advanta ges ove r JFI F, but its majo r claim to fame is sim p ly that it is an official standa r d r ather than an infor mal one. At this p oint it is unclear whether SPIFF will su p er sede JFIF o r whethe r JFIF will r emain the de-facto standa r d. IJG i ntend s to su pp o r t SPIFF once the standa r d is f r ozen, but we have not decided whethe r i t should become ou r default out p ut fo r mat o r not. (In any ca se, ou r decode r will r emain ca p able of r eading JFIF indefinitely.) Va r ious pr o pr ieta r y file fo r mats inc o rp o r ating JPEG com pr ession also exist. We have little o r no sym p athy fo r the existence of these fo r mats. Indeed, one of the o r iginal r eason s for develop ing this fr ee so ftwar e was to help for ce conve r gence on commo n, o p en fo r mat standa r ds fo r JPEG files. Don’t use a pr o pr iet a r y file fo r mat! TO DO The majo r th r ust fo r v7 will pr obably be im pr ovement o f visual qualit y. The cu rrent me thod fo r scal ing the quan tization tables is known not to be ve r y good at low Q values. We also intend to investigate block bounda r y smoothing, “ p oor man’s va r iable quantization”, and o the r means of im pr oving quality-vs-file-size p er for mance without sac r ificing com p atibility. In futu r e ve r sion s, we a r e conside r ing su pp o r ting some of the u p coming JPEG Pa r t 3 extensions --- pr inci p ally, va r iable quantization and the SPIFF f ile fo r mat. As always, s p eeding things u p is of gr eat inte r est. Please send bug r ep or ts, offe r s of hel p , etc. to j p eg- info@uunet .uu.net.  libupnp Co p yr ight (c) 2000-200 3 Intel Co rp o r ati on All r ights r ese r ved. Redist r ibution an d use in sou r ce and bina r y fo r ms, with o r without modification, a r e p er m itted pr ovided that the following conditions a r e met: *R e d i s t r ibutions of sour ce code must r etain the above co p yr ight notice, this list of conditions and the following discla ime r . *R e d i s t r ibutions in binar y for m must r e pr oduce the above co p yr ight notice, this list of conditions and the following discla ime r in the documentation and/o r othe r mate r ials pr ovided with the dist r ibution. *N e i t h e r name of I ntel Co rp o r ation no r the names of its cont r ibuto r s may be used to end o r se o r pr omo te pr odu cts de r ived f r om this softwa r e without s p ecific pr io r wr itten p e r mission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROV IDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTI ES OF MERCH ANTABILI TY AND FITN ESS FOR A PARTICULAR PU RPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIA BLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, IN CIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONS EQUENTI AL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON AN Y THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIA BILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  AVC/H.264 THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE A VC PATENT PORTFOLIO LI CENSE FOR TH E PERSONAL AND NON- COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (”AVC VIDEO”) AN D/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDE O THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER EN GAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL A CTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. No LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://MPEGLA.COM.  GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Ve r sion 2, J une 1991 Co p yr ight © 1989, 1991 F r ee Softwa r e Foundation, Inc., 51 F r anklin St r eet, Fifth Floo r , Bos ton, MA 02110- 1301 USA Eve r yone is p e r mitted to co p y and dist r ibute ve r batim co p ies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses fo r most softwa r e a r e designed to take away you r f r eedom to sha r e and change it. By cont r ast, the GNU Gene r al Public License is intended to gua r antee you r f r eedom to sha r e and change f r ee softwa r e - to make su r e the softwa r e is f r ee fo r all its use r s. This Gene r al Public License a pp lies to most of the F r ee Softwa r e Foundation’s softwa r e and to any othe r pr ogr am wh ose autho r s commit to using it. (Some othe r F r ee Softwa r e Foun dation softwa r e is cove r ed by the GNU Lesse r Gene r al Public License instead.) You can a pp ly it to you r pr ogr ams, too. When we s p eak of f r ee softwa r e, we a r e r efe rr ing to f r eedom, not pr ice. Ou r Gene r al Public Licenses a r e designed to make s u r e that you hav e the f r eedom to dist r ibute co p ies of f r ee softwa r e ( and cha r ge fo r this se r vice if you wish) , that you r eceive sou r ce code o r can get it if you want it, that you can change the softw a r e o r use p ieces of it in new fr ee pr og r ams; and that you know you can do th ese things. To pr otect you r r ights, we need to make r est r ictions that fo r bid anyone to deny you these r igh ts o r to ask you to su rr ende r the r ights. These rest r ictions tr anslate to cer tain r esp onsibilities for you if yo u dist r ibute co p ies of the softwa r e, o r if you modify it. Fo r exam p le, if you dist r ibute co p ies of such a pr og r am, whethe r g r atis o r fo r a fee, you must give the r ecip ients all the r ight s that you have. Yo u must make su r e that th ey, too, r eceive or can get the sour ce code. And you m ust show them thes e te r ms so they kn ow thei r r ights. V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 63 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
09 64 En We pr otect y ou r r ights with two ste p s: (1) co p yr ight the softwa r e, and (2) off e r you this license which gives you legal p er mission to cop y, distr ibute and /or mo dify the softwar e. Also, fo r each autho r ’s pr otecti on and ou r s, we w ant to make ce r tain that eve r yone unde r stands that the r e is no wa rr anty fo r this f r ee soft wa r e. If the softwa r e is modified by someone else and p assed on, we want its r ecip ients to know that what they have is n ot the o r iginal, so th at any pr oblems in t r oduce d by o ther s will not r eflect on the o r iginal autho r s’ re p utation s. Finally, any f r ee pr ogr am is th r eatened cons tantly by softwa r e p atents. We wish to avoid the dange r that r ed is t r ibuto r s of a f r ee pr og r am will individually obtain p atent licenses, in effect making the pr og r am pr opr ieta r y. To pr event this, we have made it clea r that any p atent must be licensed fo r eve r yone’s f r ee use o r n ot licensed at all. The pr ecise te r ms and conditions fo r co p ying , dist r ib utio n and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License a pp lies to any pr og r am o r othe r wo r k which contains a notice p laced by the co p yr ight holde r saying it may be dist r ibuted unde r the te r m s o f t h i s G e n e r al Public License. The “P r ogr am”, below, r efer s to any such pr og r am or wor k, and a “wor k based on the P r ogr am” means eithe r the P r ogr am o r any de r ivative wo rk unde r co p yr ight law: that is to say , a wo r k containing the P r og r am o r a po r tion of it, ei the r ve r batim o r with modifications and/o r tr anslated into anothe r langu age. (He r einafte r , t r anslation is included without limitation in the te r m “modification”.) Each licensee is add r essed as “you”. Activities othe r than co p ying, di st r ibution and modification a r e not cove r ed by this Li cense; they a r e outside its sco p e. The act of r unning the P r ogr am is not r estr icted, and the outp ut fr om the P r ogr am is cove r ed on ly if its c ontents constitute a wo r k based on the P r og r am (inde p endent of having been made by r unni ng the P r ogr am). Whethe r that is t r ue de p ends on what the P r og r am does. 1. You may co p y and dist r ibute ve r batim co p ies of th e P r og r am’s sou r ce code as you r eceive it, in any medium, pr ovided that you con s p icuously and a ppr opr iately p ublish on each co p y an a ppr o pr iate cop yr ight notic e and disc laime r of wa rr anty; kee p intact all the no tices that r efe r to this License and to th e absence of any wa rr anty; and give any othe r r ecip ients of the Pr ogr am a co p y of this Lice nse along with the P r og r am. You may cha r ge a fee fo r th e p hy sical act o f t r ansfe rr ing a co p y, and you may at you r op tion offe r wa rr anty pr otection in exchange fo r a fee. 2. You may modify you r co p y o r co p ies o f the P r ogr am o r any p or tion of it, thus fo r ming a wo r k based on the P r og r am, and co p y and dist r ibute such modifications o r wo r k unde r the te r ms of Section 1 abov e, pr ovided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified fi les to ca rr y pr omine nt notices stating that you chan ged the files and the date of any change. b) You must c ause any wo r k that you dist r ibute o r p ublish, t hat in whole or in p ar t contain s or is der ived f r om the P r og r am o r an y p ar t th e r eof, to be licen sed as a whole at no cha r ge to all thi r d p ar ties unde r th e te r ms of this License. c) If the modified pr og r am no r mally r eads commands inte r actively when r un, you must ca use it, when sta rted r unning fo r such inte r active use in the most o r dina r y way, to pr int o r dis p lay an announcement including an a ppr opr iate co p yr ight notice and a notice that the r e is no wa rr anty (or else, saying that you pr ovide a wa rr anty) and that use r s may r edistr ibute the pr og r am under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a co p y of this License. (Exce p tion: if th e P r og r am itself is in te r a ctive bu t does not no r mal ly pr int such an announcement, you r wor k based on the P r og r am is not r equi r ed to pr int an announcement. ) These r equi r eme nts a pp ly to the modi fied wo r k as a whole. If identifiable sections of that wo r k ar e not der ived f r om the P r og r am, and can be r easona bly con side r ed inde p endent and se p ar ate wo r ks in themselves, then this License, and its te r m s, do not a pp ly to those sections when you dist r ib ute th em as se p ar ate wo r ks. But when you dist r ibute the same section s as p ar t of a whole which is a wo r k based on the P r ogr am, the dist r ibution of the whole m ust be on the te r ms of this License, who se p er missions for other licensees extend to the entir e whole, and thus to each and eve r y p ar t r egar dless o f wh o w r ote it . Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim r ights o r contest yo u r r ights to wo r k w r itten enti r ely by yo u; r ather , the intent is to exe r cise the r ight t o con t r ol the dist r ibution of de r ivative o r collective wo r ks based on the P r og r am. In addition, me r e agg r egation of anothe r wor k not based on the P r ogr am with the P r ogr am (o r with a wo r k based on the P r og r am) on a volu me of a sto r age o r dist r ibution medium does not b r ing the othe r wo r k unde r the sco p e of this License. 3. You may co p y and dist r ib ute the P r ogr am (or a wo r k based on it, unde r Section 2) in object c ode o r executa ble fo r m unde r the te r ms of Sectio ns 1 and 2 abov e pr ovided that you also do one of the following: a) Accom p any it w ith the com p lete co rr es p onding machine- r eadable sou r ce code, which must be dist r ibuted unde r the te r ms of Section s 1 and 2 abo ve on a medium c ustoma r ily used fo r sof twa r e inte r change; o r , b) Accom p any it with a w r itten offe r , valid f o r at least th r ee yea r s, to give any thi r d p ar ty, fo r a cha r ge no mo r e than you r cos t of p hysically p er fo r ming sou r ce dist r ibution, a com p lete machine- r e adable c o p y of the co rr es p onding sou r ce code, to be dist r ibuted unde r the te r ms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medi um customa r ily used fo r softwa r e inte r change; o r , c) Accom p any it with the inf o r mation you r ec eived as to the offe r to dist r ibute co rr es p ondi ng sou r ce code . (This alte r native is allowed only fo r nonco mme r cial dist r ibution and only if you r eceiv ed the pr og r am in object code o r executable fo r m with su ch an offe r , in acco r d with Subsection b above.) The sou r ce cod e fo r a wo r k means the pr efe rr ed fo r m of the wo r k fo r m a k i n g m o d i f i c a t i o n s t o i t . F o r an ex ecutable wo r k, com p lete sou r ce code means all the sou r ce c ode fo r all mo dules it contains, p lus any associated inte r face definition files, p lus the scr ip ts used to contr ol com p ilation and installation of the executable. Howeve r , as a s p ecial exce p tion, t he sou r ce code dist r ibuted nee d not include anyt hing that is no r mally dist r ibuted (in eithe r sou r ce o r bina r y fo r m) with th e majo r com p onents (com p ile r , ke r nel, and so on ) of the o p er ating system on which the ex ecutable r uns, unless that com p onent itself accom p anies the exec utable. If dist r ibution of executable o r object code is made by offe r ing access to co p y f r om a designated p lace, then offe r ing equivalent access to c o p y the sou r ce code f r om the same p l a c e c o u n t s a s d i s t r ibution of the sou r ce code, even thou gh thi r d p ar ti es a r e no t com p elled to co p y the sou r ce along wit h the object code. 4. You may n ot co p y, m odify, sublicense, o r distr ibute the P r og r am exce p t as ex pr essly pr ovided unde r this License. Any attem p t othe r wise to co p y, modify, sublicense o r dist r ibute the P r ogr am is void, and will automatically te r minate you r r ights unde r this License. Howeve r , p ar ties who have r eceived co p ies, o r r ights, f r om you unde r this License will not ha ve thei r licenses te r minated so long a s such p ar ties r emain in full com p liance. 5. You a r e not r equir ed to acce p t thi s License, sin ce you have not signed i t. Howeve r , nothi ng else g r ants you p er mission to modify or dist r ibute the Pr ogr am or its de r ivative wo r ks. These actions a r e pr ohibited by law if you do not acce p t this License. The r efor e, by modifying o r dist r ibuting the P r og r am (o r any wo r k based on the P r og r am), you indicate yo u r accep tance of this Lic ense to do so, a nd all its te r ms and conditions fo r co p ying, dist r ibuting o r modifying the P r og r am o r wo r ks based on it. 6. Each time you r edistr ibute the P r og r am (or any wor k based on the P r ogr am), the r ecip ien t automatically r ec eives a license f r om the o r iginal licenso r to co p y, dist r ibute o r modify the P r og r am subject to thes e te r ms and condi tions. You may not im p ose any fu r ther r estr ictions on the r ecip ients’ exer cise of the r ights g r anted he r ein. You a r e not r esp onsible fo r enfo r cing co m p liance by thi r d p ar ties to this Lic ense. 7. If, as a consequence of a cou r t judgment o r allegation of p atent infr ingement or for any other r eason (not limited to p atent issues), conditi ons a r e im p osed on you (whethe r by cou r t o r der , agr ee ment o r ot he r wi se) t hat cont r adict the conditions of th is License, they do n ot excuse you f r om the c onditions of thi s License. If yo u cannot dist r ibute so as t o sati sfy simu ltaneou sly you r obligations unde r this License and any othe r p er tinent obligations, then as a consequenc e you may not dist r ibute the P r og r am at all. Fo r exam p le, if a p atent license would not p er mit r oyalty-fr ee r ed istr ibu tion o f the P r og r am by all those who r eceive co p ies di r ectl y o r indi r ectly th r ough y ou, then the only way you coul d satisfy both it and this License would be to r efr ain enti r ely f r om dis t r ibut ion of the P r og r am. If any p or tion of this section is h eld invalid o r unenfo r ceable unde r any p ar ticu la r ci r cumst ance, the balance of the section is intended to a pp ly and the section as a whole is intended to a pp ly in othe r ci r cumstances. It is not the p u rp ose of this section to induce you to inf r inge any p atents o r othe r pr op er ty r ight claim s o r to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole p u rp ose of pr otecting the integ r ity of the f r ee softwa r e dist r ibution system, which is im p lemented by p ublic license pr actices. Man y p eo p le have made gene r ous cont r ibutions to the wide r ange of softwa r e dist r ibuted th r ough that system in r eliance on consistent a pp lication of th at system; it is u p to the autho r /donor to decide if he o r she is willing to dist r ibute so ftwa r e th r ou gh any othe r system and a licensee cannot im p ose that choice . This section is intended to make tho r oughly clea r what is believed to be a cons equence of the r est of this Licen se. 8. If the d ist r ibution and/o r use of th e P r ogr am is r estr icted in ce r tain coun t r ies eithe r by p atents o r by co p yr ighted inte r faces, the o r iginal co p yr ight holde r who p laces the P r og r am unde r this License may add an ex p licit geog r ap hical dist r ibution limitation excluding those count r ies, so that dist r ibution is p er mitted only in o r among count r ies not thus excl uded. In such case, this License i nco rp o r ates the limitation as if w r itten in the body of this License. 9. The F r ee Softwa r e Foundation may p ublish r evised and/ o r new ve r sions of the Gene r al Public License f r om time to time. Su ch new ve r sions will be simila r in s p ir it to the pr esent ve r sion, but may diff e r in detail to add r ess new pr oblems o r concer ns. Each ve r sion is given a distin guishing ve r sion num be r . If the P r ogr am s p ecifies a ve r sion numbe r of this Licens e which a pp lies to it and “any late r ve r sion”, you ha ve the o p tion of following the te r ms and conditions eithe r of that ve r sion o r of any late r ve r sion p ublished by t he F r ee Softwa r e Founda tion. If the P r og r am does not s p ecify a ve r sion numbe r of this Licen se, you may choose any ve r sion eve r p ublished by t he F r ee Softwa r e Fo undation. 10. If you wish to inco rp o r ate pa r ts of the P r og r am into othe r f r ee pr og r ams whose dist r ibution conditions a r e diffe r ent, w r ite to th e autho r to ask fo r p er mission. Fo r softwa r e which is co p yr ighted by the F r ee Softwa r e Foundation, w r ite to the F r ee Sof twa r e Foundation; we sometimes make exce p tions fo r this. Ou r decision will be guided by the two goals of pr ese r ving the f r ee status of all de r ivatives of ou r f r ee softwa r e and of pr omoting the sha r ing and r euse of softwa r e g ene r ally. NO WARRANTY 11.BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRA M, TO THE EXT ENT PERM ITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING TH E COPYR IGHT HOLD ERS AND/ OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOU T WARRA NTY OF ANY KIN D, EITH ER EXP RES SED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED T O, THE IMPLIED WARRA NTIES OF MERCHANT ABILIT Y AND FITN ESS FOR A P ARTICUL AR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF A LL NECESSARY SER VICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12.IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRIT ING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PAR TY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUD ING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES AR ISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMIT ED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF S UCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAM AGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you de velo p a new pr og r am, and y ou want it to be of the g r eatest p ossible use to the p ublic, the best way to achieve this is to make it f r ee softwa r e which eve r yone can r edistr ibute and change unde r these ter ms. To do so, attach t he following notices to th e pr og r am . It is safest to attach them to the st a r t of each sou r c e f i l e t o m o s t effectively con vey the exclusion of wa rr anty; and each file should have at least the “co p yr ight” line and a p ointer to whe r e the full notice is found. <one line to give the pr og r am’s name and a b r ief idea of what it does.> Co p yr ight © <yea r > < name of autho r > This pr og r am is fr ee softwar e; you can r edistr ibute it and/ o r modif y it unde r the te r ms of the GN U Gene r al Public License as p ublishe d by the F r ee Softwa r e Foundati on; eithe r ve r sion 2 of the Li cense, o r (at yo u r op tion) any late r ve r sion. This pr og r am i s dist r ibuted in the hop e tha t it will be useful, but WIT HOUT ANY WARRAN TY; without ev en the im p lied wa rr anty of MERCHANTABILITY o r FITNES S FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See th e GNU Gene r al Public License fo r mo r e de tails. You should have r eceived a co p y of th e GNU Gen e r al Public License along with this pr og r am; if not, w r ite to V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 64 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
65 En 09 the F r ee Sof twa r e Foundation, In c., 51 F r anklin St r eet, Fifth Floo r , Bos ton, MA 02110 -1301 USA. Also add info r mation on h ow to con tact you by e lect r onic and p ap er mail. If the pr og r am is inte r active, mak e it outp ut a sho r t notice like this when it sta r ts in an inte r active mode: Gnomovision ve r sion 69, Co p yr ight © yea r name of autho r Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUT ELY NO WARRANTY; fo r details ty p e ‘show w’. This is f r ee softwa r e, and you a r e welcome to r edist r ibute it unde r ce r tain conditions; ty p e ‘show c’ f o r details. The hy p othetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘sho w c’ should show the a ppr opr iate p ar ts of the Gener al Public License. Of cou r se, the c ommands y ou use may be ca lled something othe r than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouse-c licks o r menu items - whateve r suits you r pr og r am . You sh ould also get you r emp loyer (if you wor k as a pr og r ammer ) or your school, if any, to sign a “cop yr ight disclaime r ” fo r the pr og r am, if nece ssa r y. Her e is a sa m p le; alte r the names: Yoyodyn e, Inc., he r eby disclaims all co p yr ight inte r est in the pr og r am ‘Gnomovision’ (which makes p asses at com p ile r s) w r itten by James Hacke r . <signat u r e of Ty Coon>, 1 A pr il 1989 Ty Coon, P r esident of Vice This Gene r al Public License doe s not p er mit inco rp o r ating you r pr og r am into pr o pr ieta r y pr og r ams. If yo u r pr ogr am is a sub r outine lib r ar y, you may cons ide r it mo r e useful to p er mit linking pr o pr ietar y a pp lications with the libr ar y. If this is what you want to do, use th e GNU Lesse r Gene r al Public License instead of th is License.  GNU LESSER GENERAL PUB LIC LICENSE Ve r sion 2.1, Feb r uar y 1999 Co p yr ight © 1991, 1999 F r ee Softwa r e Foundation, Inc. 51 F r anklin St r eet, Fifth Fl oo r , Boston, MA 02110-130 1 USA Eve r yone is p er mitte d to co p y an d dist r ibute ve r batim co p ies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the fi r st r eleased ve r sion of the Lesse r GPL. It a lso counts as the suc cesso r of the GNU Lib r ar y Public License, ve r sion 2, hence the ve r sion numbe r 2.1.] Preamble The licenses fo r most softwa r e a r e designed to take away you r f r eedom to sha r e and change it. By cont r ast, the GNU Gene r al Public Licenses a r e intended to gua r antee you r f r eedom to sha r e and change f r ee softwa r e - to make su r e the softwa r e is f r ee fo r all its us e r s. This license, the Lesse r Gene r al Public License, a pp lies to some s p ecially designated softwa r e p ackages - ty p ically lib r ar ies - of the F r ee Softwa r e Foundation and othe r autho r s who decide to use it. You ca n use it too, but we sugge st you fi r st think ca r efully about whethe r this license o r the o r dina r y Gene r al Public License is the bette r st r ategy to use in any p ar ticular case, based on the ex p lanations below. When we s p eak of f r ee softwa r e, we a r e r efe rr ing to f r eedom of use, not pr ice. Ou r Gene r al Public Licenses a r e designed to make su r e that you hav e the f r eedom to dist r ibute co p ies of f r ee softwa r e ( and ch a r ge fo r this se r vice if you wish) ; that you r eceive sou r ce code o r can get it if you want it; that you can change the softw a r e and use p ieces of it in new fr ee pr og r ams; and that you ar e infor med that you can do these things. To pr otect you r r ights, we need to make r est r ic tions that fo r bid dist r ibuto r s to deny you these r ights o r to ask you to su rr ende r these r ights. These rest r ictions t r anslate to ce r tain r esp onsibilities for you if you dist r ibute co p ies of the lib r ar y o r if you modify i t. Fo r exam p le, if you dist r ibute co p ies of the lib r ar y, whethe r g r at is o r fo r a f e e , y o u m u s t g i ve th e r ecip ients all the r ights that we ga ve you. You must make su r e that they, too, r eceive or can get the sour ce code. If you link other co de with the lib r ar y, you must pr ovid e com p lete object files to the r eci p ients, so that they ca n r elink them with the lib r ar y afte r m a k i n g c h a n g e s t o t h e l i b r ar y and r ecom p iling it. And you must show them these te r ms s o th ey k n o w t h e i r r ights. We pr otect you r r ights with a two-ste p method: (1 ) we co p yr ight the lib r ar y, and (2) w e offe r you this license, which gives you lega l p er mission to co p y, dist r ibute and/o r modify the lib r ar y. To pr ot ect each dist r ibut o r , we want to ma ke it ve r y clea r that the r e is no wa rr anty fo r the f r ee lib r ar y. Also, if the lib r ar y is modified by someone else and p assed on, the r ecip ients should know that wha t they have is n ot the o r iginal ve r sion, so that the o r iginal autho r ’s re p utation will not be affected by pr oblems that might be int r oduced by othe r s. Finally, softwa r e p atents p ose a constant th r eat to the existence of any f r ee pr og r am. We wish to make su r e that a com p any ca nnot effe ctively r est r ict the use r s of a f r ee pr og r am by obtaining a r estr ictive license fr om a p atent holde r . The r efo r e, we insist that any p ate nt license obtained fo r a ve r sion of the lib r ar y must be consistent with the full f r eedom o f use s p ecified in this license. Most GNU softwa r e, including some lib r ar ies, is cove r ed by the o r dinar y GN U Gene r al Public License. This license, the GNU Less e r Gene r al Public License, a pp lies t o ce r tain designated lib r ar ies, and is quite diffe r ent f r om the o r dinar y Gene r al Public License. We use this license fo r ce r tain lib r ar ies in o r de r to p er mit linking those lib r ar ies into non- f r ee pr og r ams. When a pr og r am is linked with a lib r ar y, wh ethe r statically o r using a sha r ed lib ra r y , the combination of the two is legally s p eakin g a combined wo r k, a de r ivative of the o r iginal lib ra r y. T he o r dina r y Gene r al Public License the r efo r e p er mits such linking only if the enti r e combination fits its c r iter ia of f r eedom. The Lesse r Gene r al Public License p er mits mo r e lax c r iter ia fo r linking othe r code with the lib r ar y. We call this license the “Lesse r ” Gene r al Public License because it does Less to pr otect the use r ’s f r eedom than the o r dina r y Gene r al Pub lic Lic en se. It a lso pr ovides othe r f r ee softwa r e develo p er s Less of an advant age ove r com p et ing non- f r ee pr og r ams. These disadvantages a r e the r eason w e use the o r dina r y Gener al Public License for many libr ar ies. Howeve r , th e Lesse r license pr ovides advantages in ce r tain s p ecial ci r cumstances. Fo r exam p le, on r ar e occasions, the r e may be a s p ecial need to encou r age the widest p ossible use of a ce r tain lib r ar y, so that it becomes a de-fac to standa r d. To achieve this, n on-f r ee pr og r ams must be allowed to use the lib r ar y. A mo r e f r equent case is that a f r ee lib r ar y does the same job as widely used non-f r ee lib r ar ies. In this case, the r e is little to gain by limiting the f r ee lib r ar y to f r ee softwa r e only, so we use the Lesse r Gene r al Public License. In othe r cases, p er mission to use a p ar ticular lib r ar y in non- f r ee pr og r ams enables a g r eate r numbe r of p eo p le to use a la r ge body of f r ee softwa r e. Fo r exam p le, p er mission to use the GNU C Lib r a r y in non- f r ee pr og r ams enables many mo r e peo p le to use th e whole GNU o p er ating system, as well as its va r iant, the GNU Linux o p er ating system. Although the Lesse r Gene r al Public License is Less pr otective of the use r s’ fr e edom, it does ensu r e that the use r of a pr og r am that is link ed with the Lib r ar y has the f r eedom and the whe r ewithal to r un t hat pr og r am using a modified ve r sion of the Lib r ar y. The pr ecise te r ms and conditions fo r co p yin g, dist r ib uti on and modification follow . Pay close atte ntion to the diffe r ence between a “wo r k based on th e lib r ar y” and a “wo r k that uses the lib r ar y”. The fo r me r contains code de r ived f r om the lib r ar y, whe r eas the latte r must be combined with the lib r ar y in o r der to r un. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License Ag r eem ent a pp lies to any softwa r e lib r ar y o r ot he r prog r a m which contai ns a notice p laced by the co p yr ight hol de r o r othe r au tho r ized p ar ty saying it may be dist r ibuted unde r the te r ms of this Lesse r Gene r al Public Li cense (also cal led “this Li cense”). Eac h licensee is add r essed as “you”. A “lib r ar y” means a collection of softwa r e functi ons and/ o r data pre pa r ed so as to be conveniently linked with a pp lication pr og r ams (which use some of those functions and data) to fo r m executable s. The “Lib r ar y”, below, r efe r s to any such softwa re lib r ar y o r wo r k which has been dist r ibuted und e r these ter ms. A “wo r k based on the Lib r ar y” means eith e r the Lib r ar y o r any de r ivative wo rk unde r co p yr ight law: that is to say, a wo r k containing the Lib r ar y o r a p or tion of it, eith e r ve r batim o r with modifications and/o r t r anslated st r aight fo r wa r dly into anothe r language. (He r einafte r , t r anslation is included without limitation in the te r m “modification”.) “Sou r ce code ” fo r a wo r k means the pr efe rr ed fo r m of the wo r k fo r making modi fications to it. Fo r a lib r ar y, com p let e so u r ce code means all the sou r ce code fo r all modules it contains, p lus any associated inte r face definition files, p lu s the sc r ip ts used to c ont r ol com p ilation and installation of the lib r ar y. Activities othe r th an co p ying, dist r ibution and modificati on a r e not cove r ed by this License; th ey a r e outside its sco p e. The act of r unning a pr og r am using the Lib r ar y is not r est r icted, and out p ut f r om such a pr og r am is cove r ed only if its contents cons titute a wo r k based on the Lib r ar y (inde p endent of the us e of the Lib r ar y in a tool fo r w r iting it). Whethe r that is t r ue de p ends on what th e Lib r ar y does and what the pr og r am that uses the Lib r ar y does. 1. You may co p y and dist r ibute ve r batim co p ies of th e Lib r ar y’s com p lete sou r ce code as y ou r eceive it, in any medium, pr ov ided that you cons p icuo usly and a ppro pr iately p ublish on each co p y an a ppro pr iate co p yr ight notice and disclaime r of wa rr anty; kee p in tact all the notices that r efer to th is License and to the absence of any wa rr anty; and dist r ibute a co p y of this License along with t he Lib r ar y. You may cha r ge a fee fo r the p hysi cal act of t r ansfe rr ing a co p y, and you may at you r op tion offe r wa rr anty pr otection in exc hange fo r a fee. 2. You may modify you r co p y o r co p ies of the Lib r ary o r an y p or tion of it, thus fo r ming a wo r k based on the L ib r ar y, and co p y and dist r ibute such modification s o r wo r k unde r the te r ms of Secti on 1 above, pr ovided that yo u also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified wo r k must itself be a softwa r e lib r ar y. b) You must cause the files modified to ca rr y pr ominen t notices stating that you chan ged the files and the date of any change. c) You mus t cause the who le of the wo r k to be licensed at no cha r ge to all thi r d p ar ties unde r the te r ms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Lib r ar y r efer s to a function o r a table of data to be su pp lied by an a pp lication pr og r am that uses the facility, other than as an a r gument p assed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effo r t to ensu r e that, in the event an a pp lica tion does not su pp ly such function o r table, t he fac ility still o p er ates, and p er fo r ms whateve r p ar t of its p u rp ose r emains meaningful. (For examp le, a function in a lib r ar y to com p ute squa r e r oots has a p u rp ose that is entir ely well- defined inde p endent of the a pp lication. The r efo r e, Subsection 2d r equir es that any a pp lication-supp lied function o r table used by this function mu st be o p tional: if the a pp lica tion does not su pp ly it, the squa r e r oot function must still com p ute squa r e r oots.) These r eq ui r ements a pp ly to the modified wo r k as a w h o l e . I f i d e n t i f i a b l e s e c t i o n s o f t h a t w o r k a r e not de r ived f r om th e Lib r ar y, and can be r easonably conside r ed inde p endent and se p ar ate wo r ks in themselves, then this License, and its te r ms, do not a pp ly to th ose section s when you dist r ibute them as se p ar ate wo r ks. But when you dist r ibute the same sections as p ar t of a whole which is a wo r k based on the Lib r ar y, the di st r ibution of the whole must be on the te r ms of thi s License, whose p er missions for other licensee s extend to the en ti r e whole, and thus to each and eve r y p ar t r egar dless of who w r ote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim r ights o r contest you r r ights to wo r k w r itten enti r ely by you; r athe r , the intent is to exe r cise th e r i ght to cont r ol the dist r ibution of de r ivative o r collective wo r ks based on the Lib r ar y. In addition, me r e agg r egation of anothe r wo r k not based on the Lib r ar y with the Lib r ar y (o r with a wo r k based on the Lib r ar y) on a volume of a sto r age o r dist r ibution medium does not b r ing the othe r wo r k unde r the sco p e of this Lic ense. 3. You may o p t to a pp ly the te r ms of the o r dinar y GNU Gene r al Public License instead of th is License to a given co p y of the Lib r ar y. To do this, you mus t alte r all the notices that r efer to this Lice nse, so that th ey r efer to th e o r dina r y GNU Gene r al Pu blic License, ve r sion 2, instead of to this License. (If a newe r ve r sion than ve r sion 2 of the o r dina r y GNU Gene r al Public License has a pp ea r ed, then you can s p ecify th at ve r sion instead if you wish.) Do not make any othe r change in these notices. Once this change is made in a given co p y, it is i rr eve r sible fo r that cop y, so the or dinar y GNU Gener al Public L icense a pp lies to all subsequent co p ies and de r ivative wo r ks made f r om t hat co p y. This o p tion is useful when you wish to co p y p ar t of the code of the Lib r ar y into a pr og r am that is not a lib r ar y. 4. You may co p y and dist r ibute the Libr ar y (or a p or tion or de r iv ative of it, unde r Se ction 2) in object code o r executable f o r m unde r the te r ms of Sections 1 and 2 above pr ovided that you accom p any it with the comp lete co rr es p ond ing machin e- r eadable sou r ce code, which must be dist r ibuted unde r the te r ms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customa r ily used fo r softwa r e inte r change. If dist r ibution of object code is made by offe r ing access to co py f r om a designated p lace, then offe r ing equivalent access to co p y the sou r ce code f r om the same p lace satisfi es the r equir ement to dist r ibute the sou r ce code, even though thi r d p ar ties a r e not com p elled to co p y the sou r ce along with the object co de. 5. A pr og r am that contains no de r ivative of any p or tio n of the Lib r ar y, but is designed to wo r k with the Lib r ar y by being com p iled o r linked with it, is called a “wo r k that uses the Lib r ar y”. Such a wo r k, in isolation, is not a de r ivative wo r k of the Lib r ar y, and the r efo r e falls outside the sco p e of this L icense. Howeve r , linking a “wo r k that u ses the Lib r ar y” with the Lib r ar y c r eates an executable that is a de r ivative of the Lib r ar y (because it contains p or tions of the Lib r ar y), r ather than a “wor k that u ses the libr ar y”. The executable is the r efor e co ve r ed by this License. Section 6 stat es te r ms fo r dist r ibutio n of suc h exec utables. When a “w o r k th at us es the Lib r ar y” uses mate r ial f r om a heade r file that is p ar t of the Lib r ar y, the object co de fo r the wo r k may be a de r ivative wo r k of the Lib r ar y even V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 65 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
09 66 En though the sou r ce code is not. Whethe r this is t r ue is es p ecially significant if the wo r k can be linked w ithout the Lib r ar y, o r if t he w o r k is itself a lib r ar y. The th r eshold fo r this to be t r ue is not pr ecisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only nume r ical p ar ameter s, data st r uctur e layouts and accesso r s, and small mac r os and small inline functions (ten lines o r less in length), then the use of the object file is un r estr icted, r egar dless of whethe r it is legally a de r ivative wo r k. (Ex ecutable s containing t his object code p lus p or tio ns of the Lib r ar y will still fall unde r Section 6.) Othe r wise, if the wo r k is a de r ivative of the Lib r ar y, you may dist r ibute the obj ect code fo r the wo r k u nde r the te r m s of Section 6. Any ex ecutables containing that wo r k also fall unde r Sectio n 6, whethe r or not they a r e linked di r ectly with the Lib r ar y itself. 6. As an exce p tion to the Sections above, you may also combine o r link a “ wo r k that uses the Lib r ar y” w ith the Lib r ar y to pr oduce a wo r k contain ing p or tions of the Lib r ar y, and dist r ibute that wo r k unde r te r ms of you r choice, pr ovided that th e te r ms p er mit modification of the wo r k fo r the custome r ’s own use and r ever se enginee r ing fo r debugging such modi fications. You must give pr ominent not ice with each co p y of the wo r k that the Lib r ar y is used in it and that the Lib r ar y an d its us e a r e cove r ed by this Lic ense. You must su pp ly a co p y of this Lic ense. If th e wo r k du r ing execution dis p lays co p yr ight notices, yo u must include th e co p yr ight notice fo r the Lib r ar y among them , as well as a r efe r ence di r ecting the use r to the co p y of this Lic ense. Also, y ou must do on e of these thin gs: a) A ccom p any the wo r k with the com p lete co rr es p onding mac hine- r e adable sou r ce code f o r the Lib r ar y including whateve r changes we r e used in the wo r k (which must be dist r ibut ed unde r Secti ons 1 and 2 above); and, if the wo r k is an executable linked with the Lib r ar y, wi th the com p lete machine- r eadable “ wo r k that uses the Lib r ar y”, as object code and/o r so u r ce c ode, so that the use r can modify the Lib r ar y and then r elink to pr oduce a modified executable contain ing the modified Lib r ar y. (It is unde r stood that the use r who changes the conten ts of definitions files in the Lib r ar y will not neces sa r ily be able to r ecomp ile the a pp lication to use th e modified definitions. ) b) Use a suitable sha r ed lib r ar y mechanism fo r linking with the Lib r ar y. A suitable mechanism is one tha t (1) uses at r un time a co p y of the lib r ar y al r eady pr ese nt on the use r ’s c om p ute r system, r athe r than co p ying lib r ar y functions into the ex ecutable, and (2) wil l o pe r ate pro pe r ly with a mo dified ve r sion of the lib ra r y, if th e us e r installs one, as long as the modified ve r sion is inte r face-comp atible with the ve r sion that the wo r k was made wi th. c) Accom p any the wo r k with a w r itten offe r , valid fo r at least th r ee yea r s, to give the same use r the mate r ials s p ecified in Subsection 6a, above, fo r a cha r ge no mo r e than the co st of p er fo r ming this d ist r ibution. d) If di st r ibution of the wo rk is made by offe r ing acc ess to co p y f r om a designated p lace, of fe r equivalent access to co p y the abov e s p ecified mate r ials f r om the same p lace. e) Ve r ify that the use r has al r eady r eceived a co p y of these ma te r ials o r that you hav e al r eady sent this use r a co p y. Fo r an exec utable, the r equir ed fo r m of the “wo r k that uses the Li b r ar y” must include any data and u tility pr og r ams needed for r e pr od ucing the ex ecutable fr om it. Howeve r , as a s p ecial exce p tion, th e mate r ials to be dist r ibuted n eed not inc lude anythi ng that i s no r mally dist r ibuted (in eith e r sou r ce o r bina r y fo r m) with th e majo r com p onents (com p ile r , ke r nel, and so on) of the o pe r ating sy stem on which the executa ble r uns, unless that com p onent itself accom p anie s the exec utable. It may ha pp en that this r equ ir ement cont r adicts the license r est r ictions of othe r pr o pr ietar y lib r ar ies that do no t no r mally accom p any the o p er ating system. Such a cont r adiction means you cannot use both them and the Lib r ar y togethe r in an executable that you dist r ibute. 7. You may p lace lib r ar y facilities that a r e a wo r k based on the Lib r ar y side-by-side in a single lib r ar y togeth e r with othe r lib r ar y facilities not cove r ed by this Li cense, and dist r ibute such a combined lib r ar y, pr ovided that the se p ar ate dist r ibution of the wo r k based on the Lib r ar y and of the othe r lib r ar y facilities is othe r wise p er mitted , and pr ovided that you do t hese two things: a) Accom p any the combined lib r ar y with a co p y of the same wo rk based on the Lib r ar y, uncombined wit h any othe r lib r ar y facilities. This must be di st r ibuted unde r the te r ms of the Secti ons abov e. b) Give pr ominent notice wit h the combine d lib r ar y of the fact that p ar t of it is a wo r k based on the Lib r ar y, and ex p laining whe r e to find the ac com p anying uncombined fo r m of the same wo r k. 8. You may not co p y, mo dify, sublicense , link with, o r dist r ibute the Lib r ar y exce p t as ex pr essl y pr ovided unde r this License. Any attem p t o the r wise to co p y, mod ify, sublicense, link with, o r dist r ibute the Lib r ar y is void, and will automatically te r minate your r ights under this License. Howeve r , p ar ties w ho have r ec e ived co p ies, o r r ights, fr om you under this License will not have their licenses te r minated so long as such p ar ties r emain in full com p liance. 9. You a r e not r equir ed to acce p t this License , since you have not signed i t. Howeve r , nothi ng else g r ants you p er mission to modify or dist r ibute the Libr ar y or its de r ivative wo r ks. These actions a r e pr ohibited by law if you do not acce p t this License. The r efor e, by modifying o r dist r ibuting the Lib ra r y (o r any wo r k based on the Lib r ar y), you indic ate you r acce p tance of th is License to do so, and all its te r ms and co nditions fo r co p yi ng, dist r ibut ing o r modifying t he Lib r ar y o r wo r ks based on it. 10.Each time you r edistr ibute the Lib r ar y (o r any wo r k based on the Lib r ar y), the r eci p ient automatically r eceives a license f r om the o r iginal licenso r to co p y, di st r ibute, link with o r modify the Libr ar y subject to these ter ms and conditions . You may n ot im p ose any fu r ther r estr icti ons on the r eci p ients’ exe r cise of the r ights g r anted he r ein. You a r e not r esp onsible fo r enfo r cing co m p liance by thi r d p ar tie s with this License. 11.I f, as a consequence of a cou r t judgment o r allegation of p atent infr ingement or for any other r eason (not limited to p atent issues), conditi ons a r e im p osed on you (whethe r by cou r t o r der , agr ee ment o r othe r wise) th at cont r adict the conditions of th is License, they do n ot excuse you f r om the c onditions of thi s License. If yo u cannot dist r ibute so as t o sati sfy simu ltaneou sly you r obligations unde r this License and any othe r p er tinent obligations, then as a consequenc e you may not dist r ibute the Lib r ar y at all. Fo r exam p le, if a p atent license would not p er mit r oyalty-fr ee r ed istr ibu tion o f the Lib r ar y by all those who r eceive co p ies di r ectly o r in di r ec tly th r ough y ou, then th e only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to r efr ain enti r ely f r om dis t r ibut ion of the L ib ra r y. I f any po r tion of this section is held invalid o r unenfo r ceable unde r any p ar ticular cir cumstance, the balance of the sectio n is intended to a pp ly, and the section as a whole is int ended to a pp ly in othe r ci r cumstances. It is not the p u rp ose of this section to induce you to inf r inge any p atents o r othe r pr op er ty r ight claim s o r to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole p u rp ose of pr otecting the integ r ity of the f r ee softwa r e dist r ibution system which is im p lemented by p ublic license pr actices. Man y p eo p le h ave made gene r ous cont r ibutions to the wide r ange of softwa r e dist r ibuted th r ough that system in r eliance on consistent a pp lication of that system; it is u p to the auth o r dono r to decide if he o r she is willin g to dis t r ibute softwa r e th r ough any ot he r system and a licensee cannot im p ose that choice. This section is intended to make tho r oughly clea r wh at is believed to be a consequence of the r est of this License. 12.If the dist r ibutio n and/o r use o f the Lib r ar y is r es tr icted in ce r tain count r ies eithe r by p atents o r by co p yr ighted inte r faces, the o r iginal co p yr ight holde r who p laces the Lib r ar y unde r this License may add an ex p licit geog r ap hi cal dist r ibu t ion limitation excluding those count r ies, so that dist r ibution is p er mitted only in o r among count r ies no t thus excl uded. In such ca se, this License inco rp o r ates the limitation as if w r itten in the body of this Licen se. 13.The F r ee Softwa r e Foundation may p ublish r evised and / o r new ve r sions of the Lesse r Gene r al Public License f r om time to time. S uch new ve r sions will be simila r in s pi r it to the pr ese nt ve r sion, but may diffe r in detail to add r ess new pr oblems o r conce r ns. Each ve r sion is given a distinguishing ve r sion numbe r . If the Lib r ar y s p ecif ies a ve r sion numbe r of this Licens e which a pp lies to it and “any late r ver sion”, you hav e the o p tion of following the te r m s and conditions eithe r of th at ve r sion o r of any late r ve r sion p ublished by the F r ee Softwa r e Foundation. If the Lib r ar y does n ot s p ecify a license ve r sion n umbe r , you may choo se any ve r sion eve r p ublished by the Fr ee Softwa r e Foundation . 14.If you w ish to inco rp o r ate pa r ts of the Lib ra r y into oth e r f r ee pr og r ams whose dist r ibution condi tions a r e incom p atible with the se, w r ite to the autho r to ask fo r p er mission. For softwar e which is cop yr ighted by the F r ee Softwa r e Foundation, w r ite to the F r ee S oftwa r e Foundation; we som etimes make exce p tions fo r this. Ou r dec ision will be guided by the two goals of pr ese r ving the f r ee status of all de r ivatives of ou r f r ee so ftwa r e and of pr omoting the sha r ing and r euse of softwar e gener ally. NO WARRANTY 15.BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMIT TED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIG HT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHE R PARTIES PROVID E THE LIBRAR Y “AS IS” WITH OUT W ARRAN TY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPL IED WARRANTI ES OF MERC HANTABI LITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF AL L NECESSARY SER VICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTI ON. 16.IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRIT ING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PAR TY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES , INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM AGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DA TA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH D AMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you de velo p a new lib r ar y, and you want it to be of the g r eatest p ossible use t o the p ublic, we r ecomme nd making it f r ee s oftwa r e that eve r yone can r edistr ibute and change. You can do so by p er mitting r edistr ibution unde r thes e te r ms (o r , alter nati vely, unde r th e te r ms of the o r dinar y Gene r al Pu blic License). To a pp ly these te r ms, attach the following no tices to the lib r ar y. It is safe st to attach them to the sta r t of e ach sou r ce file to most effectively convey the exclusion of wa rr anty; and each file should have at least the “co p yr ight” line and a p ointer to wher e the full notice is found. <one line to giv e the lib r ar y’s name and a b r ief ide a of what it does.> Co p yr ight © <yea r > < name of autho r > This lib r ar y is f r ee soft wa r e; you c an r edistr ibute it and/o r modify it und e r the te r ms of the GNU Lesse r Gene r al Public License as p ublished by the F r ee Sof twa r e Foundation; eithe r ve r sion 2.1 of the License, o r (at you r o p tion) any late r ve r sion. This lib r ar y i s di st r ibuted in the ho p e that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRA NTY; without even the im p lied wa rr anty of MERCHANTABILITY o r FITNESS FOR A PARTICUL AR PURPOSE. See the G NU Lesse r Gene r al Public L icense fo r mo r e det ails. You should ha ve r eceived a co p y of the GNU Lesse r Gene r al Public License along with this lib r ar y; if no t, w r ite to the F r ee Softwa r e Foundatio n, Inc., 51 F r anklin S t r eet, Fifth Floo r , Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Also add info r mation on how to c ontact you by e lect r onic and p ap er mail. You should also get you r em p loyer (if you wo r k as a pr og r amme r ) or your school, if any, to sig n a “cop y r ight discla ime r ” fo r the lib r ar y, if necessa r y. He r e is a sam p le; alte r the names: Yoyodyne, Inc ., he r eby disc laims all co p yr ight inte r est in the lib r ar y ‘F r ob’ (a lib r ary fo r tweaking knobs) w r itten by James Random Hacke r . <signatu r e of T y Coon >, 1 A pr il 1990 Ty Coon, P r esident of Vice That’s all the r e is to it!  [Notice on GNU Gene ral Public License] This pr oduct include the softwa r e licensed for use under the te r ms of a GNU Gene r al Public License. A co p y of the co rr es p on ding sou r ce code can be obtained by being cha r ged the fe e fo r dist r ibution. To obtain a co p y, contact you r local Pionee r Customer Su pp o r t Cente r. See the GNU website (ht t p ://www.gnu.o r g) fo r details of the GNU Gene r al Public L icense . V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 66 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
67 En 09 Troubleshooting Inco rr ect o p er ation is ofte n mistaken fo r t r ou ble o r malfun ction. If you think that the r e is somethin g w r ong wi th this com p onent, check the p oints below. Sometimes the t r ouble may lie in anothe r com p onent. Ins p ect the othe r com p onents and elect r ical a pp liances being used. If t he t r ouble cannot be r ectified afte r ch ecking the items below, p lease contact customer ser vices. In th e US, call Toll Fr ee (800) 421-1404. (Telep hone lines ar e op en Mo nday thr ough F r iday 6:00 AM to 4:30 PM (Pacific Time).) In Canada, ca ll Local (905) 479-4411, o r Long distance 1(877) 283-5901. (Tele p hone lines a r e o p en Mon day th r ough F r iday 9:00 A M to 5:30 PM (EST).) Playback Problem Check Remedy • Disc does not p lay. • Disc t r ay o p ens automatic ally. Is the disc one that is p layable on this p layer ? Check whethe r the disc is one that can be p layed on this p layer ( p age 8). Is the file one that is p layable on this p layer ? • Check whethe r the file is one that can be p layed on this p layer ( p age 10). • Check whethe r or not the file is damaged. Is the disc sc r atched? It may not be p ossible to p lay sc r atched dis cs. Is the disc di r ty? Clean the disc ( p age 1 5). Is the r e a p iece of p ap er or sticke r attached to the disc ? The disc may be wa rp ed an d un p layable. Is the disc pr o pe r ly set in t he disc t r ay? • Set the disc with th e pr inted side faci ng u p . • Set the disc pr o pe r ly in the depr ession in the disc t r ay. Is the r egion num be r co rr ect? See About region numbers on p age 10 fo r the r egion numbe r s of discs that can be p layed on this p layer . No p ictu r e is dis p layed o r the p ictur e is not disp layed pr o pe r ly. Is the video cable pr o pe r ly connected? • Connect the cable pr o pe r ly acco r din g to the connected devices ( p age 18). • Inse r t the cable fi r mly and all the wa y in. Is the video cable damag ed? If the cable is da maged, r ep lace it with a new one. Is the in p ut setting on the connected T V o r AV r eceiver o r am p lifie r r ight ? Read the o p er ating inst r uctions of the connected com p onents and switch to the pr o pe r in p ut. A r e you viewing the p ictu r e f r om the vide o out p ut te r minal selected with VIDEO SELECT ? P r ess VIDEO SELECT to switch the video out p ut t e r minal to be viewed ( p age 26). Is the out p ut vi deo r esolution pr o pe r ly set? Use OUTPUT RESOLUTION t o s w i t c h t o a r esolution at which the vid eo and audio s ignals a r e out p ut ( p age 27). • Is the p layer connected with an HDMI cable othe r than a High S p eed HDMI™ cable (with a Standa r d HDMI™ cable)? • A r e you using an HDMI cable with built-in equalize r ? 1080 p o r Dee p Colo r video sign als may not be out p ut pr op er ly, de p ending on the HD MI cable being used o r the p layer ’s se ttings. P r ess  while pr essing  on the p laye r ’s fr ont p anel to r estor e the video out p uts to the facto r y default settin gs. Afte r this, if you wish to out p ut the video signa ls with 1080 p or Dee p Colo r , connect the TV using a Hig h S p eed HDMI™ cable with out built-in equalize r , then r ese t the p laye r using the Setup Navigator ( p age 23). Does the conn ected TV su pp o r t the f r ame r ate of the video sign al being o ut p ut by the p laye r ? If the p ictur e is not dis p layed when p laying a disc with a f r ame r ate t hat is not su pp o r ted, th e p ictu r e will not be dis p layed even wh en p layback is sto pp ed. In this case, use the pr ocedu r e below to switch the fr ame r ate of the vid eo signals out p ut f r om the p layer . Eject the disc and close the disc t r ay. Then, pr ess  OPEN/CL OSE while pr essing  on the p laye r ’s f r ont p anel to swit ch to a f r am e r ate su pp o r ted b y the connecte d TV. Is a DVI device c onnected? The p ictur e may not be dis p layed pr op er ly if a DVI device is connected. Is NTSC on PAL TV pr o pe r ly set? When viewing the video signals out p ut fr om the p layer ’s Video te r minal, set NTSC o n PAL TV pro pe r ly ( p age 43). Is HDMI Color Space pr o pe r ly set? Change the HDMI Color Space setting ( p age 44) . V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 67 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
09 68 En No p ictu r e is dis p layed o r the p ictur e is not disp layed pr o pe r ly. A r e you using an ext r emel y long cable? Using an ext r emel y long cabl e may r esult in no ise. Use a r elatively sho r t cable. Pictu r e f r eezes and th e f r ont p anel and r emote contr ol buttons sto p wo r king. • P r ess  STOP to sto p p layb ack, then r estar t p layback. • If the p layback cannot be sto pp ed, pr ess  STANDBY/ON on th e p layer ’s fr ont p anel to tur n off the p ower , then tur n the p ower back on. • If the p ower cannot be tu r ned off, pr ess and hold  STANDBY/ON on the p layer ’s fr ont p anel fo r ove r 5 seconds. The p ower will tu r n off. Motion is unna tu r al o r p ictur e is not clear . Change the Pure Cinema setting ( p age 39) . No p ictu r e is dis p layed o r p ictur e is not outp ut in high definition when p laying BD s. With so me discs , it may not be p ossible to out p ut the video signals f r om the VIDEO out p ut te r minal o r the COMPONENT VIDEO out p ut te r minals. In this case, connect using an HDMI cab le ( p age 18). • Pictu r e is distu r bed du r ing p layback. • Pictu r e is da r k. • This p laye r su pp o r ts Mac r ovision analog co p y pr otection te chnology. With some TVs (such as with buil t-in video deck), th e p ictur e will not be dis p layed pr o pe r ly when the co p y pr otected DVD title is p layed. This is not a ma lfuncti on. • If the p layer and TV a r e connected via a DVD r ecor der /vide o deck, etc., the p ictur e will not be dis p layed pr op er ly due to analog co p y pr otection. Co nnect the p layer an d TV di r ectly. • Pictu r e is st r etched. • Pictu r e is c r o pp ed. • As p ect r atio cannot be switched. Is the TV’s as p ect ratio pr o pe r ly set? Read the TV’s o p er ating inst r uctions and s et the TV’s as p ect r atio pr o pe r ly. Is TV Aspect Ratio pro pe r ly set? Set TV Aspect Ratio pro pe r ly ( p age 42). Is 4:3 Video Out pro pe r ly set? Set 4:3 Video O ut pro pe r ly ( p age 42). Is DVD 16:9 Video Out pr o pe r ly set? Set DVD 16: 9 Video Ou t pro pe r ly ( p age 42). When video signals with a r esolution of 1080/60i, 1080/60p , 720/60p , 1080/24 p , 1080/50i, 1080/50 p o r 720/50 p a r e being out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal o r the COMPONENT VIDEO out p ut te r minals, they may be out p ut with an as p ect r atio of 16:9 even if TV Aspect Rati o is set to 4:3 (Standar d) ( p age 42). Pictu r e is inte rr u p ted. The p ictu r e may be inte rru p te d when the r esolut ion of the r ec o r ded video signal switches. P r ess OUTPUT R ESOLUTION to select a setting othe r than Auto o r Source Direct ( p age 27) . The subtitles cannot be switched. The subtitles cannot be switched fo r discs r eco r de d on a DVD o r BD r ecor der . Sound and p ictu r e a r e not synch r onized. Is Output Terminal pr o pe r ly set? Set Output T erminal pro pe r ly ( p ages 23 an d 51). Is Lip Sync pro pe r ly set? Adjust the amount of au dio delay wit h the Lip Sync setting ( p age 41). • No sound is out p ut. • Sound is not ou t p ut pr o pe r ly. Is the disc p layed back in slow motion? Is the disc p layed back in f ast fo r wa r d o r fast r ever se? No sound is out p ut du r ing slow motio n p lay and fo r war d and r ever se scanning. A r e the audio ca bles pr o pe r ly connected? • Connect the cable pr o pe r ly acco r din g to the connected devices ( p age 18). • Inse r t the cable fi r mly and all the wa y in. Is the audio cable damaged? I f the cable is damage d, r ep lace it with a new one. A r e the connected com p onents (AV r eceive r o r am p lifie r , etc.) pr o pe r ly set? Read the o p er ating inst r uctions of the connected com p onents and check the volume, in p ut, sp eaker settings , etc. Problem Check Remedy V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 68 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
69 En 09 • No sound is out p ut. • Sound is not ou t p ut pr o pe r ly. A r e you t r yin g to listen to th e sound of the HDMI OUT te r minal while watching the p ictur e fr om the COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO out p ut te r minals? Audio signals a r e not out p ut f rom the HDMI OUT te r minal when video signals a r e being out p ut f r om the COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO out p ut te r minals. When watching the p ictur e of the COMPONENT VIDEO o r VIDEO out p ut te r minals, co nnect an o p tical digi tal audio cable o r r egular audi o cables to li sten to the so und ( p age 21). Once connections a r e comp leted, use Setup Naviga tor to make the p layer ’s settings ( p age 23). Is HDMI Audio Out pro pe r ly set? Set HDMI Audio Out to Auto o r PCM. ( p age 44) . Is Output Terminal pr o pe r ly set? When ANALOG AUDIO is selected at Output Ter minal , no audi o signals a r e out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT o r DIGITAL OUT te r minal ( p age 51). Is the out p ut vi deo r esolution pr o pe r ly set? Use OUTPUT RE SOLUTION to sw itch to the r esolution at which the video and audio sign als a r e out p ut ( p age 27) . Is the AV r eceiver or am p lifie r , etc., connected to the AUDIO OUT te r minals? To listen to 2-chann el analog audio, connect t o FRONT (L/R) of the AUDIO OUT te r minals ( p age 13) an d set Audio Output Mod e to 2 Channel ( p age 43). A r e the s p eake r s pro pe r ly set? When the AV r eceiver or am p li fier , etc., is connected to the AUDIO OUT te r minals and Audio Output Mode is set to Mu lti-ch annel , set Speaker Setup pro pe r ly ( p age 47) . Is a DVI device connected? The sound will not be out p ut f r om the HDMI OUT te r minal if a DVI device is connected. Connect the device to a DIGITAL OUT te r minal o r the AUDIO OUT te r minals ( p age 21). Fo r some BDs, audio signals ar e only out p ut f r om DIGITAL OUT te r minal o r the HDMI OUT te r minal. Multi-channel sou nd is not out p ut. Is Output Terminal pr o pe r ly set? Linea r PCM (2-channe l) audio signals a r e outp ut fr om ou t p ut te r minals othe r than the one set at Output Terminal unde r Audio Out . Set Output Terminal pr o pe r ly ( p age 51). Is the audio ou t p ut of the connected AV r eceiver or am p lifie r , etc., pr o pe r ly set? Read the o p er ating inst r uctions of the connected AV r eceiver or am p lifi e r and check the audio out p ut settings of AV r eceiver or am p lifi e r . Is multi-channel sound selected? Use the menu sc r een o r AUDIO to switch the disc’s sound to multi- channel. Is the AV r eceiver or am p lifie r , etc., connected to the AUDIO OUT te r minals? When the AV r eceiver or am p li fier , etc., is connected to the AUDIO OUT te r minals , set Audio O utput Mode to Mu lti-chan nel ( p age 43) . Also, set Speaker Setup pro pe r ly ( p age 47) . Noise can be h ea r d when out p utting DTS Digital Su rr ound signals f r om the DIGITAL OUT te r minal. Is the connected AV r eceiver o r am p lifie r com p atible with DTS Digita l Su rr ound? If an AV r eceiver or am p lifier that is not com p atible with DTS Digital Su rr ound is connec ted to the DIGITAL OUT te r minal, set DTS Out to DTS  PCM ( p age 43). 192 kHz o r 96 kHz digital audio signals can not be out p ut f r om the DIGITAL OUT te r minal. It is not p ossibl e to out p ut 192 kHz o r 96 kHz digital audi o signals fr om this p laye r ’s DIGITAL OUT te r minal. The signals a r e automati cally conve r ted to 48 kHz o r less fo r out p ut . Seconda r y audio o r inte r active audio is not out p ut. Is HDMI Audio Out pro pe r ly set? When listening to the soun d f r om an HDMI OUT te r mina l, set HDMI Audio Ou t to PCM ( p age 44). A r e Dolby Digital Ou t and DTS Out pro pe r ly set? When listening to the sound f r om an DIGITAL OUT te r minal, set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital 1 , DTS Out to DTS 1 ( p age 43). Sound is fast o r slow. When an HDMI cable is connected, a r e au dio signals being out p ut fr om devices connected wit h cables othe r than HDMI cables? When a Pion ee r AV r eceiver o r am p lifier com p atible wi th the PQLS function is co nnected di r ectly to the p layer ’s HD MI OUT te r minal usin g an HDMI cable, the PQLS functio n is activated when p laying discs. Because of this, the soun d out p ut f r om com p onen ts othe r than the ones connected by HDMI cable may be fast o r slow. If this ha pp ens, set PQLS to Off ( p age 44). Afte r a disc is inse r ted, Loading stays dis p layed and p layback does not star t. A r e the r e too many files r ecor ded on the disc? When a disc on which files a r e r ecor ded is inse r ted, de p ending on the numbe r of files r eco r ded on the disc, loading may take seve r al dozen minutes.  is dis p layed in file names, etc. The cha r acter s that cannot be dis p layed on this p layer a re dis p layed in  . Problem Check Remedy V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 69 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
09 70 En KURO LINK A message indicating low memo r y a pp ea r s while p laying a BD-ROM disc. • Pe r for m Individual/Shar ed Data Erase o r Storage Fo rmat ( p age 49). • Pe r for m Applic ation Data Erase ( p age 49) . The DVD lay e r of BD and DVD hyb r id discs cannot be p layed. Is Hybrid Disc Playb ack pr o pe r ly set? Set Hybrid Disc Play back to DVD ( p age 4 5). The CD laye r of BD and CD hyb r id discs cannot be p layed. Is Hybrid Disc Playb ack pr o pe r ly set? Set Hybrid Disc Play back to CD ( p age 45). The BDMV fo r mat on BD-R/ -RE discs cannot be p layed. To p lay the BDMV fo r mat o n BD-R/-RE discs containing both BDMV and BDAV fo r mats, set BDMV/BDAV Playback Priority to BDMV ( p age 45). The p laye r does not p lay in the o r der r egister ed on the p laylist. A r e you using a comm e r cially available disc fo r the p laylist p layback? When a comme r cially available disc is us ed, the p laye r may not play in the o r de r r eg iste r ed on the p laylist. To p lay a p laylist, use a disc c r eated s p ecifically fo r this p laye r , not comme r ciall y availab le discs. Problem Check Remedy KURO LINK func tion does not wo r k. Is the HDMI ca ble pr o pe r ly connected? To use the KURO L INK function, con nect the Flat Pane l TV and AV system (AV r ecei ve r o r am p lifie r , etc.) to the HDMI OUT te r minal ( p age 20). Is the HDMI cabl e you a r e using a High S p eed HDMI™ cable? Use a High S p eed HDMI™ cable . The KURO LINK functio n may not wo rk pr o pe r ly if HDMI cable othe r than a High S p eed HDMI™ cable is used. A r e you connected to the TV using an HDMI ca ble to watch the p ictur e? If video signals a r e being out p ut f r om a te r minal othe r than the HDMI OUT te r minal, the KURO LINK function do es not wo r k. Conne ct to the TV using an H DMI cable and pr ess VIDEO SELECT to switch to the HDMI OUT te r minal ( p ages 2 0 and 26). Is KURO LINK set to On on the p laye r ? Set KURO LINK to On on the p layer (p age 44). Does the connected device su pp o r t the KURO LINK function? • The KURO LINK function will not wo r k with devices of othe r br ands that do not su pp o r t the KURO LINK function, even when connec ted using an HDMI cable. • The KURO LINK function will not wo r k if devices that do not su pp o r t the KURO LINK fu nction a r e connecte d between th e KURO LINK- com p atible device and the p laye r . • See About connections to components of other makes supportin g the KURO LINK function on p age 20. • Even when con nected to a Pione e r product com p atible with the KURO LINK funct ion, some of th e functions may n ot wo r k. Also r efe r to the o p er ating inst r uctions of the connected device. Is KURO LINK set to On on the connected device? Set KURO LINK to On on the co nnected device. The KURO LINK function o p er ates whe n KURO LINK is set to On fo r all devices connected to the HDMI OUT te r minal. Once connections and settin gs of all the devices a re finished, be su r e to check that the p layer ’s p ictur e is out p ut to the Fl at Panel T V. (Also check afte r changing the connec ted de vices and connecting an d/o r disconnectin g HDMI cables.) If the p layer ’s p ictur e is not being out p ut to the Flat Pane l TV, the KURO LIN K function may not wo r k pr op er ly. Fo r details, refe r to the o p er ating inst r uctions of the connec ted device. A r e multi p le p laye r s connected? The KURO LINK func tion may not wo r k if th r ee o r mo r e p layer s, including this p layer , a r e connected by HDMI cable . Problem Check Remedy V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 70 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
71 En 09 Network The in p ut does not switch automatica lly on the Fla t Panel TV and AV system (AV r eceiver or amp li fie r , etc.) when p layback is sta r ted on the p layer o r the Home Menu o r Home Media Galle r y is dis p layed. Is Display Power On set to Off on the p layer ? Set Display Power On to On ( p age 44). Problem Check Remedy • BD-LIVE function (connection t o the Inte r net) cannot be use d. • “Connection to the softwa r e u p dating se r ve r failed” is dis p layed when you t r y to u p date the sof twa r e. Pe r fo r m Connection Te st ( p age 49). If “Netwo r k connection test com p leted successfully.” is dis p layed, check the pr oxy se r ve r settin gs ( p age 48). Also th e r e may b e a pr oblem with th e Inte rnet conn ection. Contact you r Inte rnet se r vic e pr ovide r . “OK to g r ant netwo r k access to BD a pp lications?” is dis p layed when a B D-LIVE com p atible disc is r ead. • This is dis p layed fo r discs pr esenting secu r ity r isks r elated to connection to the Inte r net. No r mally selec t No when th is is dis p layed. To allow connection to the Inte r net, select Yes . • This may be dis p layed even if the disc do es not su pp o r t the BD-Liv e function. Softwa r e u p dating is slow. De p ending on the Inte r net c onnection an d othe r conditions, some time may be r equir ed to u p date th e softwa r e. The p laye r sto p s o p er atin g while softwa r e is being u p dated. Softwa r e u p dating takes 10 to 20 minutes. Wait un til u p dating is com p leted. DO NOT tu r n the p owe r off while the softwa r e is being u p dated. Doing so may r esult in an o pe r ation failu r e. • “WRT NG ****” is dis p layed on the f r ont p an el dis p lay du r ing softwa r e u p dating. (**** meaning an y cha r acte r s) • “WRT FAILED” is dis p layed on the f r ont p an el dis p lay du r ing softwa r e u p dating. The message is d is p layed when softwa r e u p dating has failed. Check again whethe r it ca n be u p dated pr op er ly . A message othe r th an “Netwo r k connection test com p leted successfully” is dis p layed when Connection Test is p er for med. Is “LAN cable not connected” dis p layed? Check that this p laye r and Ethe r net hub (o r r outer with hub functionality) a r e pr op er ly connected. • Is “IP add r ess ca nnot be obtained.” d is p layed? • Is “No r esp onse f r om the gateway.” dis p layed? • If the IP add r ess is obtained u sing the DHCP se r ver function, che ck the setting is co rr ect at the Display Networ k Configuration ( p age 49). Fo r details on the DHCP se r ve r function, see the o pe r ating inst r uctions of th e Ethe r net hub (o r r oute r with hub functionality). • Set the IP add r ess manually. Is “IP add r ess is ove r la pp ed.” dis p layed? • Check the o p er at ion and setti ngs of the DHC P se r ver function of the Ethe r net hub (o r r outer with hub functiona lity). Fo r deta ils on the DHC P se r ve r function, see the o p er ating inst r uctions of the Ethe r net hub (o r r outer with hub functionality) . • If this p layer ’s has been set manually , r eset the IP add r ess of this p layer or other comp onen ts. Is the Ethe r net hu b (o r r outer with hub functi onality) o pe r ating pro pe r ly? • Check the settings and o p er ation the Ethe r ne t hub (o r r outer with hub functionality). Fo r details, see the o p er ating inst r ucti ons of the Ethe r net hub. • Reboot the Ethe r net hub (o r r outer with hub functionality) . Problem Check Remedy V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 71 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
09 72 En Others Problem Check Remedy Playe r cannot be r esto r ed to the facto r y defaults. Is a disc lo aded in the p layer ? Remove the disc f r om the p layer befo r e r estor ing the p laye r to the facto r y defaults ( p age 51). Playe r cannot be cont r olled by RS-232C. Check the Advanced Setup  Baud Rate sett ing and the se r ial inte r face s p ecificatio ns ( p age 56 and 58 ). The p laye r ’s p owe r tu r ns off automatic ally. Is Auto Power Off set to On ? If Auto Power Off is set to On , the p laye r’s p owe r tu r ns off automatica ll y if no o p er ation is p er for med for over 30 minute s ( p age 46). Is Display Power Off set to On ? The p laye r ’s p owe r may tu r n off togethe r w ith the p owe r of the TV connected to the HDMI OUT te r minal. If you do no t want the p layer ’s p ower to tur n off when the T V’s p ower is tu r ned off, set Disp lay Power Off to Off ( p age 44). The p laye r ’s p owe r tu r ns on automatic ally. Is KURO LINK set to On ?T h e p layer ’s p ower may tur n on together with the p ower of t he TV connected to the HDMI OUT te r minal. If you do no t want the p layer ’s p ower to tur n on when the TV’s p ower is tu r ned on, set KURO LINK to Off ( p age 44). Playe r cannot be o p er ated with r emote cont r ol . Is an AV r eceiver or am p lifier connected t o the CONTROL IN te r minal on the p layer ’s r ear p anel? O pe r ate with the r emo te cont r ol of the device connec ted to the CONTROL IN te r minal. A r e you o pe r ating the r emote cont r ol f r om a p oint too fa r away f r om the p layer ? O pe r ate f r om with in 23 feet (7 m) of the r emote cont r ol senso r . A r e the batte r ies dead? Re p lace the batt e r ies ( p age 7). Is the RC-232C Ke y Lock command set? Cancel the Key Lock comm and. Fo r details, see the commu nications inte r face use r 's manual. Black sc r een is di s p layed though no o p er ations a r e being p er fo r med. Is Screen Saver set to On ? • The sc r eensaver tu r ns of f when the p layer ’s f r ont p anel or r emote cont r ol is o p er ated. • If you do not want the sc r eensave r to be acti vated, se t Screen Saver to Off ( p age 46). F r ont p anel dis p lay does not tu r n on. Has the f r ont p anel dis p lay been tu r ned of f? P r ess FL DIMMER on the r emote cont r ol to switch the f r ont p anel dis p lay’s br ightness ( p age 12). Buttons on the p layer 's f r ont p anel cannot be o p er ated o r the disc t r ay does not o p en. Is Front K ey Lock set to All o r Tray? Set Front Ke y Lock to Off ( p age 55). In p ut of connected TV and AV system switches automatic ally. Is KURO LINK set to On ?T h e i n p ut of the TV a nd AV system (AV r eceiver or am p lifier , etc.) connected to the HDMI OUT te r minal may automatically switch to the p layer when p layback star ts on the p layer o r the menu scr een (Home Media Galle r y, etc.) is dis p layed. If you do not want the in p uts of the connected TV an d AV system (AV r eceiver or am p lifie r , etc.) to switch automatically, set KURO LINK to Off ( p age 44). “P r ocessing failed.” is dis p layed. If the mess age a pp ea r s r ep eatedly, p lease ask you r nea r est Pionee r autho r ized se r vice cente r o r you r deale r to ca rr y out r ep ai r wo r k. Settings you have made have been clea r ed. • Have you di sconnected the p ower cor d while the p la ye r ’s p ower was on? • Has the r e been a p ower failu r e? Always pr ess  ST ANDBY/ON on the p laye r ’s f r ont p anel o r  STANDBY/ON on the r emote contr ol and chec k that POWER OFF has tu r ned off f r om the p layer ’s f r ont p anel dis p lay befo r e disconne cting the p ower co r d. Be p a r ticula r ly ca r eful when t he p owe r co r d is connected to the AC outl et on anothe r device because the p layer tur ns off in conjunction with th e device. V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 72 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
73 En 09 Glossary  Angle (Multi angle) U p to 9 cam e r a angles can be r eco r ded simultaneous ly on BD- ROM o r DVD-Video discs, letting you view the same scene f r om diffe r ent angles.  AVC HD (Advanced Video Co dec High Definition) See Playing DVDs on p age 1 0.  BDAV Of the BD fo r mat, the Audio Visual Fo r mat S p ecifications fo r HD digital b r oadcast r ec o r ding is refe rr ed to as BDAV on this p laye r and in this o p er ating inst r ucti ons.  BD-J See Playing BDs on p age 9.  BD-LI VE See Playing BDs on p age 9.  BDMV Of the BD fo r mat, the Audi o Visual For mat Sp ecifications designed fo r pr e- p ackaged high definition (HD ) movie contents is r efe rr ed to a s BDMV on this p layer and in this op er ating inst r uctions.  BONUSVIEW See Playing BDs on p age 9.  Comp onent video output This video out p ut te r mina l pr ovides clea r er p ictur es when connected t o a TV equi pp ed with com p onent in p uts. Com p onent video signa ls consist of th r ee signals, Y, P B and P R .  Deep Color See About HDMI on p age 18.  Default Gateway A default gateway is a communication device such as a r oute r which p asses data b etween ne two r ks. It is used to di r ect da ta to netwo r ks on which the destination gateway is not ex p licitly s p ecified.  DHC P (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol ) This pr otocol pr ovides configu r ation p ar amete r s (I P add r ess, etc.) fo r com p uter s and othe r devices connecte d to the netwo r k.  DNS (Domain Name System) This is a system fo r associating In te r net host names with IP add r esses.  Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is an audi o fo r mat to r eco r d the sound in u p to 5.1 channels with a f r action of the amou nt of data a s com p ar ed to linea r PCM audio signals.  Do lby Digital Plus Dolby Digi tal Plus is an audio fo r mat fo r high-definition media. Built on Dolby Digital, it combin es the efficiency and flexibility to pr ovide high quality multi-c hannel audio. With BD-ROMs, u p to 7.1 channels of digital sound can be r ecor ded.  Do lby TrueHD Dolby T r ueHD is an audi o fo r mat using lossless coding. With BD- ROMs, u p to 8 channels can be r ec o r ded at 96 kHz/24 bits, o r u p to 6 channels a t 192 kHz/24 bits.  DRM A technology fo r pr otecting co p yr ighte d digital data . Digitized videos, images and audio r etain the same quality ev en when they a r e co p ied o r t r ansfe rr ed r ep eatedly. DRM is a technology fo r r estr icting the di str ibution or p layb ack of such digital data without the auth o r ization of th e co p yr ight holde r . EXT does not ligh t on the p layer ’s fr ont p an el dis p lay when a USB (exte r nal sto r age) device is connected. Is the exte r nal sto r ag e device pr o pe r ly connected? • Tu r n the p layer ’s p ower off, then t u r n the p ower back on. • Tu r n the p layer ’s p ower off, then r econnect the exte r nal sto r age device ( p age 21). A r e you using a US B cable that is longe r than 2 mete r s? Use a USB cable wit h a length of 2 mete r s o r less. Is the p ower of th e exte r nal ha r d disk tu r ned on? Tu r n the p la ye r ’s p ower off, t hen tu r n the exte r nal ha r d disk’s p ower on. Is the exte r nal sto r ag e device connected to the USB p or t via a memo r y ca r d r eader o r USB hub? Exte r nal sto r age device may not wo r k if connected to the USB po r t via a memo r y car d r eader or USB hub. Does the e xte r nal sto r age device contain multi p le p ar titions? Exte r nal sto r age devices may not be r ecognized if t hey contain multi p le p ar titions. Some exte r nal s to r age devices may not o p er ate. EXT flashes on th e p layer ’s f r ont p anel dis p lay when a USB (exte r nal sto r age) device is connected. Is the exte r nal sto r ag e device w rite- pr otected? Tu r n the p laye r ’s p owe r off, then disable the w r ite- protection. Is the exte r nal sto r age device’s file system FAT1 6 o r FAT32? Only exte r nal sto r age devices with a FAT 16 o r FAT32 file system can be used. They may be usable if they a r e fo r matted f r om the p layer ( p age 49). Tu r n the p laye r ’s p owe r off, then tu r n the powe r back on. Problem Check Remedy V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 73 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
09 74 En  DTS Di gital Surround DTS Digita l Su rr ound is an audio fo r mat to r ecor d 48 kH z/24 bits audio signals in 5 .1 channels.  DTS-HD Hig h Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution A udio is an au dio fo r mat using lossy coding. It can r ecor d 7.1 channels at 96 kHz/24 bits.  DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Maste r Audio is an audio fo r mat using lossle ss coding. With BD-ROMs, 7.1 channels can be r ecor ded at 96 kHz/24 bits, o r 5.1 channels at 192 kHz/24 bits.  Ethe rnet A standa r d fo r lo cal a r ea netwo r ks (LAN s) used to connec t multi p le com p ute r s, etc. in the same location. T his p layer su pp o r ts 100BASE -TX.  Frames and fields A f r ame is the unit fo r one of th e still p ictur es which com p ose motion p ictur es. One fr ame consists of a p ictur e of odd lines and a p ictur e of even lines called fields in video signal with in ter laced scan method (4 80i, 1080i, etc .).  HDMI (High-Defi nition Multimedia Interface) See About HDMI on p age 18.  Interactive audio The audio s ignals r ecor ded in the titles of BD-ROMs. They includ e fo r exam p le the clicking soun d made when the menu sc r een is o pe r ated.  Interlaced scan With this method, one p ictur e is dis p layed by scanning it twice. The odd lines a r e dis p layed in the f i r st p ass, the even lin es a r e dis p layed in the se cond, to fo r m a single p ictur e (f r ame). Inte r laced scan is indi cated in this p laye r and o p er ating inst r uctio ns by an “i” afte r th e r esolution value (fo r exam p le , 480i).  IP add ress An add r ess tha t identifies a com p uter or othe r device connecte d to the Inte r net o r local a r ea netwo r k. It is r e pr es ented a numbe r in fou r sections.  Linear PCM This is r efe rr ed as the audio si gnals that a r e not com pr essed.  MAC (Media Access Co ntrol) address A ha r dwar e identifica tion numbe r assign ed s p ecifically to the netwo r k device (LAN ca r d, etc.).  MP EG (Moving Picture Exp erts Group) The name of a family of st anda r ds used to encode video and audio signals i n a digital com pr essed fo r mat. The video enco ding standa r ds include MPEG-1 Vide o, MPEG-2 Video, MPEG-4 Vis ual, MPEG-4 AVC, etc. The audio encodin g standa r ds in clude MPEG- 1 Audio, MPEG-2 Audi o, MPEG-2 AAC, etc.  Paren tal Lock See Changing the Parental Lo ck level for viewing DVDs and Changing the Age Restric tion for viewing BD-ROMs on p ag e 50.  Picture- in-Picture (P-in-P) This is a func tion fo r sup er im p osing a sub vi deo on the ma in video. Some BD-ROMs include seconda r y video, which can be su p er im p osed on the pr ima r y video.  Port number This is a sub-add r ess pr ovided below t he IP add r ess fo r simultaneously conne cting to multi p le p ar ties du r ing Inte r net communications.  Progressive scan With this method , one p ictur e is consisted of a sin gle p ictur e, without dividi ng it in two p ictur es. P r og r essive scan pr ovides clea r p ictu r es with no flicke r , in p ar ticula r fo r still pictu r es that contai n much t ext, g r ap hics, o r ho r izontal lines. P r ogr essive scan is indicated in this p layer and o p er ating inst r uctions by a “ p ” afte r the r esolution value (fo r exam p le, 480 p ).  Proxy server This is a r elay se r ver fo r en su r ing fast access and safe communicatio ns when connecting t o the Inte r net f r om an inte r nal netwo r k.  Region number See About region numbers on p age 10.  Secondary audio Some BD-ROMs include sub audio st r eams mixed with the main audio st r eam. These sub aud io st r eams a re ca lled “second a r y audio”. On some discs this seconda r y audio is r ecor de d as the audio fo r the seconda r y video.  Secondary video Some BD-ROMs include sub videos su p er imp osed on the main videos using the Pictu r e-i n-Pictur e function. These su b videos a r e called “seconda r y video”.  Subnet mask This is used to identi fy which p ar t of th e IP add r ess co rr es p onds to the subnet (a se p ar ately managed netwo r k). The subnet mask is ex pr essed as “255.255.255. 0”.  USB(Universal Serial Bus) USB is the indust r y standar d for connecting p er ip her als to PCs.  VC-1 A video codec develo p ed by Mic r osoft a nd standa r di zed by the Society of Motion Pictu r e and Television Enginee r s (SMPTE). Some BDs include videos encoded in this codec.  x.v.Color See About HDMI on p age 18. V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 74 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
75 En 09 Specifications Note •T h e s p ecifications and design of this pr oduc t a r e subject to change wi thout notice. •T h i s pr oduct includes FontAvenue ® fonts licenced by NEC Co rp o r ation. FontAvenue is a r egiste r ed t r adema r k of NEC Co rp o r ation. Model BDP-V6000 Type Blu- r ay Disc PLAYER Rated voltage AC 120 V Rated frequenc y 60 Hz Power consumption 32 W Power consumpt ion (standby) 0.3 W Inrush curr ent 26 A o r less Weight 7 lb 12 oz (3.5 kg) External dime nsions (in cluding projectin g parts) 16 9 / 16 in. (W) x 3 in. (H ) x 11 5 / 16 in. (D) (420 mm (W) x 75 mm (H) x 2 87 mm (D)) Tolerable opera ting temperatur e 41 °F to 95 °F ( 5 °C to 35 °C) Tolerable opera ting humidity 5 % to 85 % (no condensati on) Output terminals HDMI 1 set, 19- p in: 5 V, 250 mA Video outp uts Video 1 set, RCA jack: 1.0 V p -p (7 5 Ω ) Compone nt video 1 set, RCA jacks: Y: 1.0 V p -p (75 Ω ) P B , P R : 0.7 V p- p (75 Ω) Audio outputs 7.1-channel (m ulti-channel: front lef t/ right, surround left/rig ht, center, surround back le ft/right, subwoofe r) 1 set, Numbe r of channel s: 8, RC A jacks Audio output level 200 mV r ms (1 kHz, –20 dB) Frequency re sponse 4 Hz to 88 kHz (192 kHz sam p ling) Digital audio outputs Optical 1 set, O p tical digital jack LAN 1 set, Ethe r net jack (100BASE-TX) Control Input 1 set, Minijack (3.5 ø) USB 1 set, Ty p e A RS-232C 1 set, D-sub 9- p in (male) conn ector confor ming to RS-232C standa r ds x 1 (inch sc r ew th r eads) V6000_CUXJ_E N.book 75 ページ ２００９ 年６月５日　金曜日　 午前１１時５７分
Printed in <VRB1522-A> PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 Published b y Pioneer Corporation. Copyright © 2009 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reser ved. Should this product require ser vice in the U.S.A. and you wish to locate the nearest P ioneer Authorized Independent Ser vice Company , or if you wish to purchase replacement parts, operating instructions, ser vice manuals, or accessories, please call the number shown below . 1 – 8 0 0 – 8 7 2 – 4 1 5 9 Please do not ship your product to P ioneer without first calling the Customer Support at the above listed number for assistance. P ioneer Electronics (USA), INC. Ser vice Support Division P .O . BOX 1760, Long Beach, CA 90801-1760, U.S.A. F or warranty information please see the Limited W arranty sheet included with your product. Should this product require ser vice in Canada, please contact a P ioneer Canadian Authorized Dealer to locate the nearest P ioneer Authorized Ser vice Company in Canada. Alternatively , please contact the Customer Satisfaction Department at the following address: P ioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc. Customer Satisfaction Department 300 Allstate P arkway , Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 F or warranty information please see the Limited W arranty sheet included with your product. Si ce produit doit être réparé au Canada, veuillez vous adresser à un distributeur autorisé P ioneer du Canada pour obtenir le nom du Centre de Ser vice Autorisé Pioneer le plus près de chez-vous. V ous pouvez aussi contacter le Ser vice à la clientèle de Pioneer: P ioneer Électroniques du Canada, Inc. Ser vice Clientèle 300, Allstate P arkway , Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 P our obtenir des renseignements sur la garantie, veuillez vous reporter au feuillet sur la garantie restreinte qui accompagne le produit. S021_C_EF 10_backcover_V60 00_CUXJ.fm 76 ペ ージ ２００ ９年６月５日 　金曜日　午 後７時２６分